section 1 · 2017-07-24 · 6 indicator symbols on the instrument cluster and multi−information...

1

FEATURES ON NEW TOYOTA VEHICLEOverview of instruments and controls Instrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster and multi−information display overview 5. . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster and multi−informationdisplay 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 1

2

Instrument panel overview

1. Side vent 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Side defroster outlet

3. Instrument cluster 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Center vents 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Glove box 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. Power door lock switches 40. . . . . . . . .

7. Power window switches 43. . . . . . . . . . .

8. Auxiliary box 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9. Cup holders 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10. AUX adapter 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11. Power outlet 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12. Tilt steering lock release lever 104. . . .

13. Hood lock release lever 45. . . . . . . . . . .

14. Parking brake pedal 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15. Power rear view mirror control switches 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16. Window lock switch 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11p020

3

1. Headlight and turn signal switches 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Wiper and washer switches 117. . . . . . .

3. “POWER” switch 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Clock 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Multi−information display or navigation system including multi−information display (For the navigation system, see the separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.) 160. . . . . . . .

6. Emergency flasher switch 114. . . . . . . . .

7. Trip meter reset button 123. . . . . . . . . . .

8. Km/h or MPH button 124. . . . . . . . . . . . .

9. Audio system 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10. Power outlet 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11. “P” position switch 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12. Electronic shift lever(R, N, D, B) 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13. Key slot 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14. Cruise control switch 156. . . . . . . . . . . . .

15. Tire pressure warning reset switch 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16. Smart entry and start system cancel switch 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11p019

4

17. Climate remote control switches 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18. Instrument panel light control dial 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19. Audio remote control switches 277. . . .

5

1. Service reminder indicators and indicator lights 125, 133. . . . . . . . . .

2. Speedometer

3. Fuel gauge 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Odometer and trip meter 123. . . . . . . . .

Instrument cluster and multi−information display overview

11p002k

6

Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster and multi−information display

orand

Brake system warning lights*1

Driver’s seat belt reminder light*1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light*1

Malfunction indicator lamp*1

Low fuel level indicator light*1

Open door warning light*1

Master warning light*1

Anti−lock brake system warning light*1

SRS warning light*1

Engine oil replacement reminder light*1

(for vehicles sold in the U.S.A.)

Vehicle stability control system warning light*1

Charging system warning light*2

High coolant temperature warning light*2

Low engine oil pressure warning light*2

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Tire pressure warning light*1

7

or

Hybrid vehicle immobilizer / Theft deterrent system indicator light

Tail light indicator light

Shift position indicator light*4

Driving ready light

Automatic air conditioner indicator light

Recirculate mode indicator light

Smart entry and start system warning light*5

Windshield air flow indicator light

Slip indicator light

Headlight high beam indicator light

Headlight indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Cruise control indicator light*3

Hybrid system warning light*2

Automatic head light leveling systemwarning light*2

Electric power steering system warning light*2

“AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers indicator light

Hybrid battery warning light*2

8

*1: For details, see “Service reminder indi-cators and warning buzzers— —Instru-ment cluster” on page 125.

*2: For details, see “Service reminder indi-cators and warning buzzers— —Multi−information display” on page 133.

*3: If this light flashes, see “Cruise con-trol” on page 156.

*4: For details, see “Hybrid transaxle” onpage 144.

*5: For details, see “Smart entry and startsystem” on page 24.

9

FEATURES ON NEW TOYOTA VEHICLEToyota hybrid systemToyota hybrid system 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toyota hybrid system operating condition 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting your vehicle 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For efficient use of your vehicle 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautions for use 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 2

10

Toyota hybrid system combines a gaso-line engine and electric motor power toimprove the fuel economy and minimizethe emissions as well as to providebetter power performance than the ordi-nary gasoline−powered vehicles.

Depending on the driving condition, thevehicle runs on the best combination of;

� Gasoline engine power

� Electric motor power generated bythe gasoline engine

� Electric motor power of the hybridbattery

Furthermore, the energy is efficiently usedin the following ways:

� When stopping the vehicle, the gaso-line engine is automatically stopped.

� When applying the brakes or decelerat-ing, electricity is converted from theturning force of the wheels and storedin the hybrid battery. (This is calledregenerative brake.)

Since the battery is charged by thegasoline engine as needed, it does notrequire charging from an outsidesource like an electric vehicle.

Basic operations are described below. Be-sides, Toyota hybrid system performs vari-ous controls depending on the operatingcondition: The “Energy Monitor” screentells you which power is used currently.

12p059b

Electric powerin use

When starting or backing up, etc., thevehicle runs on electric power from hybridbattery, because the gasoline engine effi-ciency is low.

Toyota hybrid systemToyota hybrid systemoperating condition

11

12p060b

Gasoline powerin use

During normal driving, the vehicle runsmainly on gasoline power. However, theelectric motor, using electric power gener-ated by the gasoline engine, can supple-ment the gasoline engine power.

The vehicle controls the optimum ratio ofthe gasoline and electric power to helpuse energy more efficiently.

12p061b

Electric and gasolinepower in use

When driving at full throttle, additionalelectric power is applied from the hybridbattery. Vehicle performance improves.

12p062b

Storing electric power

When decreasing speed or applying thebrakes, the turning force of the wheelsmakes the electric motor operate as agenerator and additional electricity isstored in the hybrid battery (regenerativebrake).

12

12p063b

Not in use

When stopping, the gasoline engine auto-matically shuts off.

12p064b

Charging hybrid battery

When the hybrid battery power is insuffi-cient, the gasoline engine charges the hy-brid battery. The system always supplieselectricity at a constant level.

Your vehicle is equipped with push but-ton start system. The hybrid systemwill start automatically by pressing the“POWER” switch briefly with the brakepedal depressed.

With smart function

1. Carry the key with you.

2. Press the “POWER” switch briefly withthe brake pedal depressed.

Without smart function

1. Insert the key.

2. Press the “POWER” switch briefly withthe brake pedal depressed.

The “READY” light flashes and stays on.Two beeps sound after a few seconds,and the hybrid system will start. (If theambient temperature is low such as duringwinter, it may take time until the “READY”light comes on.) You cannot start yourvehicle when the brake pedal is not de-pressed. (For details, see “How to startthe hybrid system—” on page 350.)

The engine may not start even with the“READY” light on.

Starting your vehicle

13

Drive your vehicle with a smooth accel-eration and deceleration.

� While driving, energy is recoveredthrough the regenerative brake as thevehicle decelerates. However, for moreefficient use, do not accelerate or de-celerate your vehicle more than neces-sary.

� Avoid abrupt acceleration and decelera-tion.

� The remaining capacity of the hybridbattery can be confirmed on the energymonitor screen of the multi−informationdisplay. See “Information” on page 166for details. Gradual or non−abrupt ac-celeration or deceleration will more ef-fectively use the benefits of an electricmotor without having to use gasolineengine power.

When parking, be sure to put the hy-brid transaxle in “P”. While driving, usethe hybrid transaxle in “D”.

� In “N”, the gasoline engine operatesbut electricity cannot be generated. Thebattery will be discharged requiring un-necessary engine power to recharge.

� The hybrid system automatically re-charges the hybrid battery when theremaining battery power is reduced.However, the charging is not availableif the hybrid transaxle is “N”.

INFORMATION

The gasoline engine starts and stopsautomatically. (It stops during a lowload driving, deceleration or when thevehicle is stopped.)

If the “READY” light remains on, youcan start your vehicle using the elec-tric motor even with the gasoline en-gine stopped.

The gasoline engine may not stop au-tomatically in the following condi-tions:

� During gasoline engine warm−up

� During hybrid battery charging

� During low or high hybrid batterytemperature

For efficient use of yourvehicle

14

The vehicle runs in combination withthe gasoline and electric power. Payspecial attention to the following items.

Be careful of high voltage and hightemperature.

Your vehicle is equipped with the orangecolored cables connected to the hybridbattery (about 200 V) and to other compo-nents that are all high voltage.

CAUTION

Do not touch or come in contact withorange cables or battery terminals.Electric shock may cause serious in-jury or death. Read all caution labels.

An electric motor, coolant radiator andsome other parts reach high temperaturewhile driving. Caution labels are applied tothese parts. Carefully observe the instruc-tions on these caution labels.

CAUTION

Never remove or disassemble anyhigh voltage part, high voltage cables(orange color) and their connectors.It may cause death or serious injury.

12p078

Inverter unit

Hybrid battery

Serviceplug

High volt-age cables

Air conditioning compressor

High voltage cables

Electric motor

Do not touch the service plug.

The service plug is installed in the leftside trim of the luggage compartment. Itis provided to disable high voltage currentfrom the hybrid battery when the vehicleis in need of repairs at your Toyotadealer.

CAUTION

� The shaded parts in the illustrationare subjected to high voltage.

� Inappropriate handling may causean electric shock resulting in seri-ous injury or death. Never touchany item in shaded area.

These high voltage parts or cablesconsisting of an electromagneticshielding structure produce relativelythe same amount of electromagneticwaves as conventional gasoline−fueled vehicles or home electric ap-pliances.

As unwanted noise may occur in thereception of mobile radios, contactyour Toyota dealer for installation orremoval.

Always keep your hybrid vehicle’s driv-ing characteristics in mind.

CAUTION

The driver should pay full attentionaround the vehicle especially when itis driven only by the electric motor(with the gasoline engine stopped).People in the immediate area mightmisjudge the hybrid vehicle move-ment based on the absence of theregular engine noise.

Precautions for use

15

� As the vehicle runs with both the gaso-line engine and electric motor, you mayhear a motor sound coming from theengine compartment.

� When the hybrid system is started orstopped, you may hear a sound comingfrom the hybrid battery in the luggagecompartment. However, this does notindicate any trouble.

� If the “READY” light is on, you canstart even though the gasoline enginemay be off.

� When you shift the shift lever to “B”and release it to its original positionand your foot from the accelerator ped-al, engine braking will be applied. How-ever, during high speed driving youmay feel that deceleration by enginebraking is less than that of ordinaryvehicle.

Be sure to put the hybrid transaxle in“P” when parking.

In “N”, the hybrid battery assembly is notcharged, even if the gasoline engine isoperating. You cannot run your vehicle ifthe hybrid transaxle is left in “N” for along time because the hybrid battery as-sembly will be discharged.

When you leave your vehicle, put thehybrid transaxle in “P” and set theparking brake. Be sure to carry the keywith you and lock all the doors.

If you leave the hybrid system in “ACC”or “IG−ON”, the hybrid system may notstart because the 12 volt battery will bedischarged.

If the vehicle is parked for a long time,the hybrid battery will discharge gradually.To keep the hybrid battery in good condi-tion, drive the vehicle at least once everyseveral months for at least 30 minutes orten miles. If the hybrid battery becomesfully discharged and the vehicle will notstart even with a jump−start to the 12 voltbattery, contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� When you leave your vehicle, besure to shut off the hybrid system.

� Be sure to put the hybrid transaxlein “P” because the vehicle can startwith the “READY” light on and theengine stopped (no engine soundand vibration). When the “READY”light is on, if you leave your ve-hicle in shift position other than“P” and “N”, the vehicle will creepand start abruptly with the accelera-tor pedal being depressed by mis-take. This may cause death or seri-ous injury.

16

12p065a

Type 1

12p008d

Type 2

When the multi−information displayshows this message, the master warn-ing light ( ) comes on in the instru-ment cluster. Read the message andfollow the instruction.

� When you leave your vehicle, or stopor park for a while, put the hybridtransaxle in “P”.

� Charging is necessary. In “N”, chargingwill not be applied. The electric genera-tor operates in “P”, “D” or “B”. If youcontinue driving, put the hybrid trans-axle in “D” or “B” and depress theaccelerator pedal. Do not leave the hy-brid transaxle in “N”. When driving intraffic jam, operate in “D”.

12P009d

Do not allow anyone to lean against theside of the rear right seatback, nor putany luggage or other obstructions on it.

� An air vent is provided on the side ofthe rear right seatback to cool the hy-brid battery. If this vent is covered, thehybrid battery will overheat resulting ina reduction of the output performanceof the hybrid system.

� The seat belt not properly set in theguide on the top of the rear seat mayblock the air vent. Be sure to pass theseat belt through the guide properly.

17

� Do not wet or put foreign objects overthe air vent. Otherwise, the hybrid bat-tery may be adversely affected and bedamaged.

� You may hear a cooling fan noise fromthe air vent.

� If water is used to wash the inside ofthe vehicle or inside the luggagecompartment, or a large volume of wa-ter is spilled in these areas, the hybridbattery may be damaged, or a shortcircuit may occur.

For vehicle repairs or maintenance, besure to consult your Toyota dealer.

If your vehicle is beyond repair becauseof accident or something, be sure toconsult your Toyota dealer.

As sealed Nickel−Metal hydride batteriesare used, be sure to consult your Toyotadealer when disposing of your vehicle.

CAUTION

If you are involved in an accident,follow these precautions.

� Move the vehicle to a safe placeand perform the followings to re-duce the risk of high voltage elec-tricity leakage.� Depress the brake pedal and apply

the parking brake.

� Press the “P” position switch andstop the hybrid system.

� If the key is inserted into key slot,remove it.

� If your vehicle has experienced ma-jor damage, you may get an electricshock. To prevent this, never touchthe high voltage parts (hybrid bat-tery assembly, etc.) or cables(orange color) connecting theseparts. If some exposed electricwires are protruding inside or out-side of the vehicle, an electricshock may also occur. Never touchthem.

� If the fluid leaks or gets in somepart of the vehicle, never touch itbecause it may be electrolyte(strong alkali) from the hybrid bat-tery. If it gets on your skin or eyes,wash off immediately with a largeamount of water, if possible, withboric acid solution, and get immedi-ate medical attention in order tohelp avoid serious injury.

� If a vehicle fire occurs, extinguishit using a fire extinguisher for theexclusive use on electric fires. Asa small amount of water may bedangerous, use a large amount ofwater, for example from a fire hy-drant, or wait for a fire−fightingteam arrival.

� If your vehicle needs to be towed,do it with the front wheels or allfour wheels raised. If the frontwheels are on the ground whentowing, the electric motor may con-tinue to generate electricity whichcould leak electricity. A fire couldoccur depending on the degree ofdamage. See “If your vehicle needsto be towed” on page 376.

19

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSKeys and DoorsKeys 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid vehicle immobilizer system 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smart entry and start system 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless remote control 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side doors 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back door 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft deterrent system 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 1

20

Keys

21p001a

1. Master keys with silver ornament (Ve-hicles equipped with smart entry andstart system)—These keys work in ev-ery lock. Your Toyota dealer will needone of them to make a new key witha built−in transponder chip. Before youuse these keys, be sure to read “Smartentry and start system” on page 24.

2. Master keys without silver ornament(Vehicles not equipped with smart entryand start system)—These keys work inevery lock. Your Toyota dealer willneed one of them to make a new keywith a built−in transponder chip.

3. Mechanical keys (attached to the mas-ter keys)—These key work for the driv-er’s door only.

21P112

USING A MECHANICAL KEY

When you use the mechanical key in-cluded on the side of the key, slide thelock knob in the arrow direction and takeout the key as shown. To put the keyback, slide the lock knob in the arrowdirection and replace the key. Be sure toput the key back when not in use.

Since the doors can be locked without akey, you should always carry a sparemaster key in case you accidentally lockyour keys inside the vehicle.

CAUTION

� People with implanted pacemakersor cardiac defibrillators should keepaway from the smart entry and startsystem antennas, because the radiowaves may affect the operation ofsuch devices. For the antenna loca-tions, see “ANTENNA LOCATIONS”on page 26.

� Users of any electrical medical de-vice other than implanted pacemak-ers and implanted cardiac defibrilla-tors should consult the manufactur-er of the device for informationabout its operation under the influ-ence of radio waves. Radio wavescould have unexpected effects onthe operation of such medical de-vices.

� If necessary, the smart function canbe disabled. See “DEACTIVATINGTHE SMART FUNCTION” on page34.

21

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-ponder chip, observe the followingprecautions:

� Do not affix any material that cutsoff electromagnetic waves (such asa metal seal) on the key.

� Do not knock the key hard againstother objects.

� Do not leave the key exposed tohigh temperatures for a long period,such as on the dashboard or hoodunder direct sunlight.

� Do not put the key in water orwash it in an ultrasonic washer.

� Do not keep the key together withthe products emitting electromag-netic waves such as a cellularphone.

21p005a

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.

21p113b

DEACTIVATION USING THE SMARTFUNCTION

The hybrid vehicle immobilizer systemis a theft prevention system. When youenter the vehicle carrying a smart keyand press the “POWER” switch, theelectronic code in the key is automati-cally checked to determine whether itcorresponds to the registered ID codefor the vehicle. If the ID code is veri-fied, you can start the hybrid system.

Hybrid vehicle immobilizersystem

22

21p007b

The system is automatically set when thehybrid system is off and driver’s door isopened. The indicator light will start flash-ing to show the system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditionsoccurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

� The indicator light stays on exceptwhen the theft deterrent system is set-ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrentsystem” on page 46.)

� The indicator light does not start flash-ing when the hybrid system is off anddriver’s door is opened.

� The indicator light flashes inconsistent-ly.

Carrying a smart key and pressing the“POWER” switch automatically cancels thesystem, which enables the hybrid systemto start. The indicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you anew key with built−in transponder chip,your dealer will need your key numberand master key. However, there is a limitto the number of additional keys yourToyota dealer can make for you.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-semble the hybrid vehicle immobilizersystem. If any unauthorized changesor modifications are made, proper op-eration of the system cannot be guar-anteed.

21p006a

DEACTIVATION USING THE KEY

The hybrid vehicle immobilizer systemis a theft prevention system. When youinsert the key in the key slot, the trans-ponder chip in the key transmits anelectronic code to the vehicle. The hy-brid system will start only when theelectronic code in the chip correspondsto the registered ID code for the ve-hicle.

23

21p007b

The system is automatically set when thekey is removed from the key slot. Theindicator light will start flashing to showthe system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditionsoccurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

� The indicator light stays on exceptwhen the theft deterrent system is set-ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrentsystem” on page 46.)

� The indicator light does not start flash-ing when the key is removed from thekey slot.

� The indicator light flashes inconsistent-ly.

Inserting the registered key in the key slotautomatically cancels the system, whichenables the hybrid system to start. Theindicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you anew key with built−in transponder chip,your dealer will need your key numberand master key. However, there is a limitto the number of additional keys yourToyota dealer can make for you.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-semble the hybrid vehicle immobilizersystem. If any unauthorized changesor modifications are made, proper op-eration of the system cannot be guar-anteed.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZRI−24KTYMADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

24

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 ofindustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device. 21P120b

1. Locking and unlocking2. Starting the hybrid system

By carrying a smart key, you can lockand unlock the doors and start the hy-brid system.

For locking the doors, see “Locking thedoors with smart function” on page 30.For unlocking the doors, see “Unlockingthe door(s) with smart function” on page31. For starting the hybrid system, see“Push button start system” on page 138.

If the smart key battery is discharged, thesmart function cannot be used. Use themechanical key attached to the smart keyby inserting it in the driver’s door keyholeto lock or unlock door. To start the hybridsystem, insert the smart key into the keyslot. In order to activate the smart func-tion, the battery should be replaced. Fordetails, see “—Replacing battery” on page38.

You can deactivate the smart function byusing the cancel switch. In this case, allthe smart function will be deactivated. Fordetails, see “Deactivating the smart func-tion” on page 34.

Smart entry and start system

25

INFORMATION

� Be sure to take the smart key withyou.

� In the following cases, the smartfunction or wireless remote controlfeature may not operate properly. (Ifthis happens, use a mechanical keyto lock or unlock the driver’s doorand a smart key to start the hybridsystem.)

� When facilities issuing strongelectromagnetic waves such asTV towers, electric power sta-tions, broadcasting stations arenearby.

� When you are carrying a smartkey together with a mobile com-munications system such as atwo−way radio or cellular phone.

� When the smart key is in contactwith or covered by a metallic ob-ject.

� When another person is operatinga wireless remote control func-tion on another vehicle near yourvehicle.

� If you do not drive your vehicle,store the smart key, keeping it atleast 5 m (16 ft.) away from the ve-hicle.

CAUTION

� People with implanted pacemakersor cardiac defibrillators should keepaway from the smart entry and startsystem antennas, because the radiowaves may affect the operation ofsuch devices. For the antenna loca-tions, see “ANTENNA LOCATIONS”on page 26.

� Users of any electrical medical de-vice other than implanted pacemak-ers and implanted cardiac defibrilla-tors should consult the manufactur-er of the device for informationabout its operation under the influ-ence of radio waves. Radio wavescould have unexpected effects onthe operation of such medical de-vices.

� If necessary, the smart function canbe disabled. See “DEACTIVATINGTHE SMART FUNCTION” on page34.

26

21p157

ANTENNA LOCATIONS

1. Antennas inside cabin

2. Antennas outside cabin

ALARMS AND WARNING LIGHT

Your vehicle is equipped with alarmsinside and outside, as well as warninglight in the instrument cluster, that re-mind you if there is a problem involv-ing the smart entry and start system.

This warning light will come on when the“IG−ON” mode is enabled and will go offafter a few seconds.

If an alarm sounds or the warning lightcomes on, be sure to check your ve-hicle and smart key.

27

(a) The hybrid system was not turnedoff and the transaxle was in a posi-tion other than “P”.

When the driver’s door is opened with thehybrid system in “ACC” or “IG−ON” andwith the transaxle in a position other than“P”.

Inside alarm: Beeps continuously

Multi−information display: Warning mes-sage

Alarms will be turned off by any of thefollowing operations:

� Closing the driver’s door

� Pressing the “P” position switch

� Turning off the hybrid system

(b) The smart key was brought outsidethe vehicle with the transaxle in aposition other than “P”.

When the driver’s door is opened orclosed with the hybrid system not to beturned off and with the transaxle in aposition other than “P”, it is determinedthat the smart key is not in the vehicle.

Inside alarm: Beeps continuously

Outside alarm: Beeps continuously

Warning light: On

Alarms will be turned off by any of thefollowing operations:

� Pressing the “P” position switch

� Bringing the smart key inside the ve-hicle

� Turning off the hybrid system

(c) The hybrid system was not turnedoff with the transaxle in “P”.

When the driver’s door is opened with thehybrid system in “ACC” and with thetransaxle in “P”.

Inside alarm: 3 beeps

In the “IG−ON” mode, an alarm will notsound.

(d) The smart key was brought outsidethe vehicle.

When the driver’s door is opened orclosed with the hybrid system not to beturned off (and with the transaxle in “P”),it is determined that the smart key is notin the vehicle.

Inside alarm: One beep

Outside alarm: 3 beeps

Warning light: On

(e) Locking with smart function was at-tempted with the hybrid system notto be turned off.

When you attempt to lock all the doorsusing smart locking function with the hy-brid system not to be turned off and withthe transaxle in a position other than “P”.

Outside alarm: One beep (sounds for 2seconds)

Warning light: On

At this time, the doors cannot belocked.

28

(f) The smart key was brought outsidethe vehicle.

When a door other than the driver’s dooris opened or closed with the hybrid sys-tem not to be turned off, it is determinedthat the smart key is not in the vehicle.


Outside alarm: 3 beeps

Warning light: On

(g) Preventing the key from beinglocked inside the vehicle

When you close the door with the hybridsystem off but with the smart key left inthe vehicle, and attempt to lock all thedoors using smart locking function, it isdetermined that the smart key is in thevehicle.


INFORMATION

� This function may not operate whenthe smart key is left on the instru-ment panel, luggage cover, floor orin the glove box.

� The function may operate if thesmart key is brought outside but itis very close to the door window ordoor handle.

(h) Low smart key battery

When the hybrid system is turned to“ACC” or “OFF” about 20 minutes afterthe hybrid system is turned on or to “IG−ON”, it is determined that the smart keybattery voltage is low.


(i) Outside of effective range

When the “POWER” switch is pressed, itis determined that the smart key is not inthe vehicle.


Warning light: On (for 5 seconds)

(j) Open door warning

When you attempt to lock all the doorsusing smart locking function with the hy-brid system turned off but with any dooropen.


Alarms will be turned off by either ofthe following operations:

� Closing all the doors

� Pressing the unlock button on thesmart key

29

Warning and its meaning

Inside warning alarm Outside warning alarm Warning light Causes

One beep (sounds continuously) — — The driver’s door was opened when the hybrid system was in “ACC”

or “IG−ON” and when the transaxle was in a position other than “P”.

One beep (sounds continuously)

One beep (sounds continuously) On

The driver brought out the smart key from the vehicle with the hybridsystem not to be turned off and with the transaxle in a position otherthan “P”.

Beeps(sound intermittently) — — The driver’s door was opened when the hybrid system was in “ACC”

and when the transaxle was in “P”.

One beep 3 beeps On The driver brought out the smart key from the vehicle with the hybridsystem not to be turned off and with the transaxle in “P”.

— One beep(sounds for 2 seconds) On The lock switch was pressed with the hybrid system not to be turned

off and with the transaxle in “P”.

One beep 3 beeps On The passenger brought out the smart key from the vehicle with thehybrid system not to be turned off.

— One beep(sounds for 2 seconds) — The lock switch was pressed when the hybrid system was off but with

the smart key left in the vehicle.

One beep — — The key battery voltage become about 2 V. (3 V for normal operation)

One beep — On(for 5 seconds)

The “POWER” switch was pressed when the smart key was not in theeffective range of the system.

— One beep(sounds for 10 seconds) — The lock switch was pressed when the hybrid system was off but any

door was opened.

30

21p128

Side door

21p139

Back door

LOCKING THE DOORS WITH SMARTFUNCTION

The smart entry and start system willlock the doors without being insertedinto the door keyhole.

When you exit the vehicle carrying thesmart key and push the lock button on theoutside front door handle or back doorwith all the doors closed, all the doors willbe locked provided that the electroniccode in the key corresponds to the regis-tered ID code for the vehicle.

At this time, you will hear one beep andthe turn signal lights flash once. However,when you push the lock button on theoutside front door handle or back doorwith any door not closed securely, a beepsounds for 10 seconds.

NOTICE

If the key is in the vehicle, do notperform door locking operation, oryou might lock your keys inside thevehicle.

INFORMATION

� The rear doors are not equippedwith smart function.

� When locking the doors, be sure topush the lock button on the outsidefront door handle or back doorslowly and surely. If you push thebutton quickly, the doors may notlock.

� When opening or closing a door, donot touch the lock button on theoutside door handle or back door. Ifyou push the button, an alarmsounds 10 seconds.

� When a wireless remote control isused to lock the doors and a smartkey is left in the effective range ofthe smart function in the vehicle,the doors cannot be unlocked usingthe smart function. In this case, usethe wireless remote function to un-lock the doors.

� You cannot activate smart unlockingfunctions within 3 seconds after thesmart locking function is activated.

31

21p136

UNLOCKING THE DOOR(S) WITHSMART FUNCTION

The smart entry and start system canbe used to unlock the door(s) withoutbeing inserted into the door keyhole.

When you get close to your vehicle (about1 m (3 ft.) from each outside front doorhandle), and are carrying the smart key,the electronic code emitted from the keyis automatically checked to determine if itcorresponds to the registered ID code forthe vehicle. When you take hold of theside back of the outside door handle sur-face, it will unlock. At this time, twobeeps sound and the turn signal lightsflash twice.

When you push and hold down the backdoor opener switch, carrying the smartkey, the ID code is checked in the sameway as in the front door case. And all thedoors will unlock. At this time, two beepssound and the turn signal lights flashtwice.

When you get close to your vehicle (about1 m or 3 ft. from either front door), carry-ing the smart key or unlock the back doorusing smart key function, the interior lightcomes on for 15 seconds if the interiorlight switch is in the “DOOR” position.However, the interior lights go out whenyou push the power door lock switch inthe lock position or press the “POWER”switch once or twice from the off settingto select the “ACC” or “IG−ON” modewithout depressing the brake pedal. Forfurther information, see “Interior lights” onpage 115.

You have 30 seconds to open a door afteroperating the smart unlocking function. Ifa door is not opened by then, all thedoors will be automatically locked again.

INFORMATION

� The rear doors are not equippedwith smart function.

� When unlocking the door(s), be sureto take hold of the back side of theoutside door handle firmly asshown in the illustration. Takinghold of the handle with a glovedhand might cause a delay in unlock-ing.

32

� When you take hold of the handleor push the back door opener tounlock the door(s), be sure to con-firm that the door(s) have been un-locked. If the two beeps and theturn signal lights flash twice, thedoors are unlocked. At this time,you can pull the outside door han-dle or push the back door opener toopen the door. If you quickly movecloser to the vehicle or pull the out-side door handle or push the backdoor opener quickly, the doorsmight not unlock. If you cannotopen the door by pulling the out-side door handle or pushing theback door at this time, push backthe outside door handle to the origi-nal position or release your handfrom the back door and then tryagain.

� If you bring the smart key veryclose to the outside door handle orthe back door opener, the doorsmight not lock.

� If another person who is not carry-ing a smart key takes hold of anoutside door handle or push theback door opener when you arewithin the effective range of thesmart function, the door(s) may notunlock.

� If a large amount of water is ap-plied to the outside door handle orthe back door during heavy rain ora car wash, and someone carrying asmart key is near the vehicle, thedoor(s) might be unlocked. However,if the outside front door handle isnot pulled out or back door openernot pushed, the doors will lock au-tomatically after about 30 seconds.

� To ensure the unlocking door(s),perform unlocking operation within3 seconds after getting close to thevehicle (about 1 m or 3 ft. from thefront doors or back door). If ittakes longer than that, unlockingfunction may not be enabled.

CHANGING THE DOORS TO BE UN-LOCKED

Each time you push the lock buttontogether with the panic button on thesmart key for about 5 seconds with thehybrid system off, the setting for doorunlocking will change as follows:

1. Driver’s door unlocking mode: If youperform smart unlocking operation onthe driver’s door, it will unlock. Per-forming unlocking operation on thefront passenger’s door or back doorwill unlock all the doors. When thesystem switches to this mode, onebeep sounds inside the vehicle and twobeeps sound three times.

2. All doors unlocking mode: Performingsmart unlocking operation on eitherfront door or back door will unlock allthe doors. When the system switchesto this mode, one beep sounds insidethe vehicle and two beeps sound twice.

3. Single door unlocking mode: Thedriver’s door or back door on whichyou perform smart unlocking operationwill unlock. However, performing un-locking operation on the front passen-ger’s door will unlock all the doors.When the system switches to thismode, one beep sounds inside the ve-hicle and two beeps sound once.

33

INFORMATION

� When changing the mode, be sureto push both lock and panic but-tons firmly, or panic alarm may beactivated.

� This operation will not change thewireless remote control unlockingfunction.

� In the single or driver’s door un-locking mode, if you get into thevehicle from the driver’s door carry-ing the smart key, all the smart un-locking controls activated by thesmart key will be stopped for secu-rity. If you get out of the vehiclefrom the driver’s door carrying thesmart key and get out of the effec-tive range of the smart function,unlocking control by the smart keywill be possible. However, unlockingcontrol may not be carried out for5 seconds after you get out fromthe vehicle. In this case, operateunlock control again after 5 sec-onds.

BATTERY POWER SAVING

When doors are locked, the smart entryand start system transmits electromagneticwaves to the outside of the vehicle atregular intervals. For this reason, the ve-hicle battery will be discharged if the ve-hicle is left for a long time. If the key isleft within the effective range of the smartfunction outside of the vehicle, the keyand the vehicle transmit electromagneticwaves periodically. If these conditions con-tinue for a long time, the battery in thekey and vehicle will be discharged.

To prevent the batteries from being dis-charged, the smart function is automatical-ly deactivated in the following conditions:

� If there is no response from the keyfor more than 14 days

� If the key is left within the effectiverange of the smart function outside ofthe vehicle for more than 10 minutes

To reactivate the smart function, performany of the following:

(a) Press the lock button on the outsidefront door handle or back door whilecarrying the smart key.

(b) Perform a wireless remote control op-eration.

(c) Insert and turn the mechanical key inthe keyhole of the driver’s door.

34

INFORMATION

� To maintain communication with thevehicle, smart keys use built−in bat-tery power. The battery service lifeis about 1 to 3 years on average. Ifbattery power becomes insufficient,replace the battery with a new one.

� The smart key continually receiveselectromagnetic waves, and if it re-ceives strong electromagnetic wavesover a period of time, the batterycan be drastically run down. There-fore, avoid storing smart keys nearany electrical appliances.

Here is a list of electrical ap-pliances which may have adverseeffects on the smart key perfor-mance: TVs, personal computers,cellular phone or cordless phonerecharger units, electric light standsand fluorescent desk lights

Note that you should always keepsuch electrical appliances at least 1m (3 ft.) away from the smart key.

21p152

1. Smart function is on.2. Smart function is off.

DEACTIVATING THE SMART FUNCTION

The cancel switch for this function islocated at the bottom of the instrumentpanel on the driver side. When youpush the switch, the smart function willbe deactivated. Pushing the switchagain will reactivate the function.

When the smart function is deactivated,use a mechanical key or wireless remotecontrol function key to lock and unlock thedoors. To start the hybrid system, inserta smart key into the key slot.

If you do not intend to drive your vehiclefor a long time, push the cancel switch todeactivate the smart function.

INFORMATION

The smart function will be deactivatedin the following cases:

� The cancel switch is turned on.

� The smart key is inserted into thekey slot.

� The battery of the smart key is dis-charged.

35


FCC ID: MOZB31EGMADE IN JAPAN

FCC ID: MOZB31UGMADE IN JAPAN

FCC ID: MOZRO−2TY−1MADE IN JAPAN

FCC ID: PENASAT2MADE IN JAPAN



CAUTION




(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

21p147

1. Lock switch

2. Indicator light

3. Unlock switch

4. Panic switch

The wireless remote control system isdesigned to lock or unlock all the sidedoors and back door, or activate thetheft deterrent system from a distancewithin approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of thevehicle.

When you operate any switch, push itslowly and securely. At this time, the indi-cator light flashes once.

Wireless remote control—

36

The wireless remote control key is anelectronic component. Observe the follow-ing instructions in order not to cause dam-age to the key.

� Do not leave the key in places wherethe temperature becomes high such ason the dashboard.

� Do not disassemble it.

� Avoid knocking it hard against otherobjects or dropping it.

� Avoid putting it in water.

If your vehicle is equipped with smartentry and start system, you can use upto 5 master keys for the same vehicle. Incase of the vehicle not equipped withsmart entry and start system, up to 4master keys are available. Contact yourToyota dealer for detailed information.

If the wireless remote control key doesnot actuate the doors or alarm or operatefrom a normal distance, or indicator lighton the key is dimmed or does not comeon:

� Check for closeness to a radio trans-mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the key.

� The battery may have been consumed.Check the battery in the key. To re-place the battery, see “—Replacing bat-tery” on page 38.

If you lose your key, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible to avoid thepossibility of theft, or an accident. (See “Ifyou lose your keys” on page 379.)

21p013f

Locking operation

21p014f

Unlocking operation

—Locking and unlockingdoors

37

To lock and unlock all the doors, pushthe switches slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the lock switch. All the sidedoors and back door are locked simulta-neously. At this time, the turn signal lightswill flash once.

Check to see that the doors are securelylocked.

If any of the doors is not securely closedor if the key is in the key slot, lockingcannot be performed by the lock switch.At this time, a beep will sound for 10seconds on the vehicle with smart entryand smart system. However, if the key isin the key slot, a beep will not sound. Tostop the beep, close all the side doorsand back door securely or push the un-lock switch.

The buzzer can be disabled. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

To unlock: Push the unlock switch once tounlock the driver’s door alone. Pushingthe switch twice within 3 seconds unlocksall the doors simultaneously. Each timethe unlock switch is pushed, the turn sig-nal lights will flash twice.

This double switch operation to unlock allthe side doors and back door can bechanged to a single switch operation. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

When the unlock switch is pressed theinterior light comes on. The light remainson for about 15 seconds unless any of thedoors is opened and then closed. (Forfurther information, see “Interior lights” onpage 115.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door afterusing the wireless remote unlock feature.If a door is not opened by then, all thedoors will be automatically locked again.

The timing for the automatic door lockfunction can be changed. For details, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

If the lock or unlock switch is keptpressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-tion is not repeated. Release the switchand then push it again.

The following adjustments can be made inthis system. For details, contact yourToyota dealer:

� Canceling the wireless door locking orunlocking function

� Canceling the flash of the turn signallights

21p015a

Pushing the panic switch for 1 secondblows the horn intermittently andflashes the headlights, tail lights andemergency flashers and turns on theinterior light.

The panic switch is used to deter vehicletheft when you witness anyone attemptingto break into or damage your vehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stopthe alarm midway, do the follows:

� Push any switch on the key.

� Put the hybrid system in the “IG−ON”mode.

—Activating panic mode

38

The panic mode does not work in “IG−ON”mode.

The alarm function can be activated ordeactivated. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.


FCC ID: MOZB21TGMADE IN JAPAN

FCC ID: MOZB21RGMADE IN JAPAN



CAUTION




(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

For replacement, use a CR2032 lithiumbattery or equivalent and a special screw-driver.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken thatsmall children do not swallow the re-moved battery or components.

NOTICE

� When replacing the battery, be care-ful not to lose the components.

� Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended by aToyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local laws.

Replace the battery by following proce-dures.

—Replacing battery

39

21p016d

1. Remove the mechanical key and coverwith slide the lock knob in the arrowdirection.

21p017c

2. Remove the 4 screws to take out thelid of the module.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

3. Remove the discharged battery and putin a new battery with positive (+) sideup.

NOTICE

� Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the battery arefaced correctly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause unexpectedrust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside the transmitter, or itmay interfere with proper operation.

� Be careful not to bend the electrodewhen inserting the battery and thatdust or oils do not adhere to thecase.

4. Install the lid with the 4 screws.

NOTICE

Take care not to damage or bend theO−ring when installing.

5. Replace the mechanical key and coverwith slide the lock knob.

After replacing the battery, check that thekey operates properly. If the key still doesnot operate properly, contact your Toyotadealer.

40

21p008a

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE DRIV-ER’S DOOR WITH MECHANICAL KEY

Insert the mechanical key into the key-hole and turn it.

To lock: Turn the knob forward.To unlock: Turn the knob backward.

The alarm sounds when you unlock thedoor using a key with the theft deterrentsystem set. For details, see “Theft deter-rent system” on page 46.

21p009a

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH IN-SIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The driver’s door can be opened by pull-ing the inside door handle even if the lockknob is depressed.

Closing the door with the lock knob in thelock position will also lock the door. Becareful not to lock your keys in the ve-hicle.

The driver’s door cannot be locked if youleave the key in the key slot.

21p010a

Driver’s side

21p011a

Front passenger’s side

Side doors

41

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on thefront side.To unlock: Push the switch down on therear side.

All the doors lock or unlock simultaneous-ly.

21p012b

REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”position as shown on the label.

When the child−protector is locked, youcannot open the rear door by the insidedoor handle. We recommend using thisfeature whenever small children are in thevehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-vent the doors from being openedunintentionally.

42

12p032

To open the back door, push the backdoor opener and raise the back door.

If the back door opener does not operate,see “If you cannot operate back dooropener” on page 380.

12p033

When closing the back door, the insidehandle can be used to make the reacheasier.

See “Cargo and luggage” on page 344 forprecautions to observe when loading lug-gage.

To close the back door, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the back door,try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-ly closed.

CAUTION

Keep the back door closed while driv-ing. This not only keeps the luggagefrom being thrown out, but also pre-vents exhaust gases from enteringthe vehicle.

If the 12 volt battery is disconnected orrun down, the back door will be automati-cally locked and the back door systemmay not work after you reconnect, replaceor recharge the 12 volt battery. In any ofthese cases, normalize the back door sys-tem by following procedure.

1. Unlock the back door with the remotecontrol key or power door lock switch.

2. Close the back door completely byhand.

If the back door system does not operateproperly after the above procedure, theremay be a problem in the system. Contactyour Toyota dealer.

Back door

43

21p019a

The windows can be operated with theswitch on each door.

The power windows work when the “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, they work for 43 seconds evenafter the hybrid system is stopped. Theystop working when either front door isopened.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

21p020b

Automatic operation: Push the switchcompletely down or pull it completely up,and then release it. The window will fullyopen or close. To stop the window part-way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-site direction and then release it.

Jam protection function: If somethinggets caught between the window and win-dow frame during automatic closing opera-tion or key off closing operation, the win-dow stops and opens halfway.

If the window receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

If the 12 volt battery is disconnected orrun down, the power window may notoperate automatically and the jam protec-tion function will not function correctly af-ter you reconnect, replace or recharge the12 volt battery. In any of these cases, youshould normalize the power window.

To normalize the power window:

1. Push down the power window switchand lower the window halfway.

2. Pull up the switch until the windowcloses and hold the switch for a sec-ond.

Make sure that the window opens andcloses automatically. If the power windowcannot be operated properly, have itchecked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Never try jamming any part of yourbody to activate the jam protectionfunction intentionally, as it could re-sult in death or serious injury.

� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the window is fullyclosed.

Power windows

44

21p021b

Window lockswitch

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’ WINDOWS

Use the switch on each passenger’sdoor or the switches on the driver’sdoor that control each passengers’ win-dow.

The window moves as long as you holdthe switch.

To open: Push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passengers’ windowscannot be operated.

21p022b21p022c

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious injury, youmust do the following.

� Before you close the power win-dows, always make sure there isnobody around the power windows.You must also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in death or serious in-jury. When anyone closes the powerwindows, make sure that he or sheoperates the windows safely.

� When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerwindow switches without supervi-sion. Use the window lock switch toprevent them from making unex-pected use of the switches.

� Turn the hybrid system “OFF” andtake the key with you, when youleave your vehicle.

45

� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle, es-pecially with the key still inserted orwith the hybrid system other than“OFF”. Otherwise, he/she could usethe power window switches and gettrapped in a window. Unattended per-son (particularly a small child) canbe involved in a serious accident.

21p026c

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. Thehood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hoodis closed and securely locked. Other-wise, the hood may open unexpected-ly while driving and an accident mayoccur.

21p027d

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up theauxiliary catch lever and lift thehood.

Hood

46

21p032e

3. Hold the hood open by inserting thesupport rod into the slot.

Before closing the hood, check to see thatyou have not forgotten any tools, rags,etc. and return the support rod to itsclip—this prevents rattles. Then lower thehood and make sure it locks into place.If necessary, press down gently on thefront edge to lock it.

CAUTION

After inserting the support rod intothe slot, make sure the rod supportsthe hood securely from falling downon to your head or body.

NOTICE

Be sure to return the support rod toits clip before closing the hood. Clos-ing the hood with the support rodinserted into the slot could cause thehood to bend.

Theft deterrent system

21p028a

To deter vehicle theft, the system isdesigned to sound an alarm if any ofthe doors or hood is forcibly unlockedor the battery terminal is reconnectedwhen the vehicle is locked.

The alarm blows the horn intermittentlyand flashes the headlights and tail lightsand other exterior lights.

This function can be deactivated or acti-vated. For details, contact your Toyotadealer.

47

21p007b

SETTING THE SYSTEM

When the key is inserted into the keyslot:

1. Remove the key.

In case of the smart entry and startsystem:

1. Stop the hybrid system and open thedriver’s door.

The indicator light will start flashing. (See“Hybrid vehicle immobilizer system” onpage 21 for details.)

2. Have all passengers get out of thevehicle.

3. Close and lock all the doors and hood.

The indicator light will come on when allthe doors and hood are closed andlocked.

The system will automatically be set after30 seconds. When the system is set, theindicator light will start flashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator lightstarts flashing, you may leave the ve-hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle whenyou set the system, because unlockingfrom the inside will activate the system.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm underthe following conditions:

� If any of the doors is unlocked or ifthe hood is forcibly opened without themechanical key, wireless remote controltransmitter or smart function.

� If the battery terminal is disconnectedand then reconnected.

The indicator light will come on when thesystem is activated.

If any of the doors are unlocked withoutthe mechanical key, wireless remote con-trol transmitter or smart function and thekey is not in the key slot, all the doorswill be automatically locked again.

After 1 minute, the alarm will automaticallystop and the indicator light will startsflashing again.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resetsthe alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under thesame circumstances described in“Activating the system”.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the followingtwo ways:

� Turn the hybrid system to “IG−ON”.

� Unlock any of the doors with the me-chanical key, wireless remote controltransmitter or smart function.

If the 12 volt battery becomes dischargeddue to the vehicle being unused for a longtime, etc., when the battery is rechargedor replaced, the system will sound thealarm. If this happens, immediately stopthe alarm.

48

CANCELING THE SYSTEM

The system will be cancelled by theabove mentioned two ways.

If the tail lights come on for 2 seconds,the theft deterrent system has beenalarmed. Check to see if there is anyabnormality on your vehicle.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above.The doors should be locked with themechanical key, wireless remote controltransmitter or smart function. Be sureto wait until the indicator light goes offor starts flashing.

3. Unlock any door from the inside. Thesystem should activate the alarm.

4. Stop the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the otherdoors and hood. When testing the backdoor, also check that the system isactivated when the 12 volt battery ter-minal is disconnected and then recon-nected. When testing the hood, releasethe lock with the hood lock releaselever and raise the hood.

If the system does not work properly,have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

21p117

This indicates that the fuel filler dooris on the left side of your vehicle.

21p030e

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull thelever up.

When refueling, turn off the hybridsystem.

Fuel tank cap

49

CAUTION

� Do not smoke, cause spark or allowopen flames when refueling. Thefumes are flammable.

� When opening the cap, do not re-move the cap quickly. In hot weath-er, fuel under pressure could causeinjury by spraying out the fillerneck if the cap is suddenly re-moved.

� Do not fuel additionally after initialauto−stop filling up, or fuel maysplash out.

21p114

12

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turnthe cap counterclockwise by 90 de-grees (to the pressure point 1), andthen turn it a additional 30 degrees(to point 2). Pause slightly beforeremoving it.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swooshwhen the cap is opened.

21p115

3. The removed cap can be stored onthe back side of the fuel filler door.

Position the cap so that the hooks pointto the left and right, and set it in thereceptacle on the back side of the door.

When installing the cap, turn the capclockwise until you hear a click. Whenyou hear the click, the cap is fullyclosed.

If the cap is not tightened securely, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on.Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

50

CAUTION

� Make sure the cap is installed se-curely to prevent fuel spillage inthe event of an accident.

� Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tankcap for replacement. It is designedto regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the cap, applyforce only in the turning direction tothe cap. Do not pull or pry it.

51

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOccupant restraint systemsSeats 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fold−down rear seat 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrest 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS airbags 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 2

52

While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-hicle occupants should have the seatbackupright, sit well back in the seat and prop-erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

� Do not drive the vehicle unless theoccupants are properly seated. Donot allow any passengers to sit ontop of a folded−down seatback, orin the luggage compartment or car-go area. Persons not properlyseated and/or not properly re-strained by seat belts can be killedor severely injured in the event ofemergency braking or a collision.

� During driving, do not allow anypassengers to stand up or movearound between seats. Otherwise,death or severe injuries can occurin the event of emergency brakingor a collision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys withconsiderable force, and can causedeath or serious injury especially ifthe driver is very close to the airbag.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbagis the first 50−75 mm (2−3 in.) ofinflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10in.) from your diver airbag providesyou with a clear margin of safety.This distance is measured from thecenter of the steering wheel to yourbreastbone. If you sit less than 250mm (10 in.) away now, you canchange your driving position in sever-al ways:

� Move your seat to the rear as faras you can while still reaching thepedals comfortably.

� Slightly recline the back of theseat. Although vehicle designs vary,many drivers can achieve the 250mm (10 in.) distance, even with thedriver seat all the way forward, sim-ply by reclining the back of theseat somewhat. If reclining the backof your seat makes it hard to seethe road, raise yourself by using afirm, non−slippery cushion, or raisethe seat if your vehicle has thatfeature.

� If your steering wheel is adjustable,tilt it downward. This points the air-bag toward your chest instead ofyour head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-ommended by NHTSA above, whilestill maintaining control of the footpedals, steering wheel, and your viewof the instrument panel controls.

SeatsFront seats——Front seat precautions

53

Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag alsodeploys with considerable force, andcan cause death or serious injury es-pecially if the front passenger is veryclose to the airbag. The front passen-ger seat should be as far from theairbag as possible with the seatbackadjusted, so the front passenger sitsupright.

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed inthe driver and front passenger seats.Observe the following precautions.

� Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use, sincethe side airbag inflates with consid-erable speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or seriously in-jured.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the area where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats with sideairbags. Such change may preventthe side airbag system from activat-ing correctly, disable the system orcause the side airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving as the seat mayunexpectedly move and cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

� Be careful that the seat does nothit a passenger or luggage.

� After adjusting the seat position, re-lease the lever and try sliding theseat forward and backward to makesure it is locked in position.

� After adjusting the seatback, pushyour body back against the seat tomake sure the seat is locked inposition.

� Do not put objects under the seats.Otherwise, the objects may interferewith the seat−lock mechanism orunexpectedly push up the seat posi-tion adjusting lever and the seatmay suddenly move, causing thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

—Seat adjustment precautions

54

� While adjusting the seat, do not putyour hands under the seat or nearthe moving parts. Otherwise, yourhands or fingers may be caughtand injured.

22p001e

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull itup. Then slide the seat to the desiredposition with slight body pressure andrelease the lever.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the driver andthe front passenger are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats. Ifyou are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdomenor your neck may contact the shoul-der belt. In the event of a frontalcollision, the more the seat is re-clined, the greater the risk of deathor serious injury.

—Adjusting front seats

55

22p226a

1. Remove the head restraint. Hold thecenter of the lever and pull it up.Then slide the seat further forwardthan the front−most lock position.

22p227a

2. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le-ver to unlock and push down theseatback.

When returning the seatback upright, becareful not to make yourself hit by theseatback which will bound with consid-erable spring force.

After returning the seat to its originalposition, be certain to replace the headrestraint.

CAUTION

� Do not allow passengers to ride onthe flattened seat while driving; usethe seat in the normal position.

� After putting back the seat, trypushing the seat and seatback for-ward and rearward to make sure itis secured in place. Be certain toreplace head restraint.

—Flattening seatbacks

56

Lower the head restraints to the lowestposition. Push down the lock releasebutton and fold the seatback down.

Each seatback can be folded separately.

This will enlarge the luggage compartmentas far as the seatbacks. See “Cargo andluggage” on page 344 for precautionswhen loading luggage.

CAUTION

When only rear left seat is foldeddown, rear seat alone can be used.Never sit on the center seat becausethe rear center seat belt cannot befastened correctly when the rear leftseat is folded down.

22p203

BEFORE RETURNING REAR SEAT

Make sure the shoulder belt passthrough the guide when returning theseatback up.

If the shoulder belt on the rear right seatis off the guide, the air vent for coolingthe hybrid battery may be blocked by thebelt. If the hybrid battery cannot becooled, the output performance is limited,reducing the driving performance.

Fold−down rear seat

57

CAUTION

When returning the seatback to theupright position, observe the follow-ing precautions in order to preventdeath or serious injury in a collisionor sudden stop:

� Make sure seatback is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback.Failure to do so will prevent theseat belt from operating properly.

� Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in the properposition and are ready to use.

22p002b

Front

22p101b

Rear

For your safety and comfort, adjust thehead restraint before driving,

To raise: Pull it up.To lower: Push it down while pressing thelock release button.

Rear center head restraint—When an oc-cupant sits on the rear center seat, al-ways pull up the rear center head re-straint to the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective whenit is close to your head. Therefore, usinga cushion on the seatback is not recom-mended.

CAUTION

� Adjust the center of the head re-straint so that it is closest to thetop of your ears.

� After adjusting the head restraint,make sure it is locked in position.

� Do not drive with the head re-straints removed.

Head restraints

58

21p242

To use the armrest, pull it down asshown in the illustration.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest,avoid putting heavy loads on it.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver andpassengers in the vehicle be properly re-strained at all times with the seat beltsprovided. Failure to do so could increasethe chance of injury and/or the severity ofinjury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicleare designed for people of adult size,large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-propriate for the child until the child be-comes large enough to properly wear thevehicle’s seat belts. For details, see “Childrestraint” on page 86.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. According to accidentstatistics, the child is safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, theseat belts should be worn properly. If anaccident occurs and the seat belts are notworn properly, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the airbag may cause death orserious injury to the child.

Do not allow any children to stand up orkneel on either rear or front seats. Anunrestrained child could suffer serious in-jury or death during emergency braking ora collision. Also, do not let the child siton your lap. Holding a child in your armsdoes not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Ask your doctor forspecific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips and not on thewaist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-ry, first check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

ArmrestSeat belts——Seat belt precautions

59

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seatsproperly wearing their seat beltswhenever the vehicle is moving.Otherwise, they are much more likelyto suffer serious bodily injury ordeath in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

When using the seat belts, observethe following:

� Use the belt for only one person ata time. Do not use a single belt fortwo or more people—even children.

� Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thedriver and the front passenger aresitting up straight and well back inthe seats. If you are reclined, thelap belt may slide past your hipsand apply restraint forces directlyto the abdomen or your neck maycontact the shoulder belt. In theevent of a frontal collision, themore the seat is reclined, the great-er the risk of death or personal in-jury.

� Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. Take care thatthey do not get caught or pinchedin the seat or doors.

� Inspect the belt system periodically.Check for cuts, fraying, and looseparts. Damaged parts should be re-placed. Do not disassemble ormodify the system.

� Keep the belts clean and dry. Ifthey need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Neveruse bleach, dye or abrasive clean-ers, or allow them to come intocontact with the belts—they mayseverely weaken the belts. (See“Cleaning the interior” on page385.)

� Replace the belt assembly (includ-ing bolts) if it has been used in asevere impact. The entire assemblyshould be replaced even if damageis not obvious.

22p007Tab

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit upstraight and well back in the seat. Tofasten your belt, pull it out of the re-tractor and insert the tab into thebuckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjuststo your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during asudden stop or on impact. It also maylock if you lean forward too quickly. Aslow, easy motion will allow the belt toextend, and you can move around freely.

—Fastening front and rearseat belts

60

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-pletely extended and is then retractedeven slightly, the belt is locked in thatposition and cannot be extended. This fea-ture is used to hold the child restraintsystem securely. (For details, see “Childrestraint” on page 86.) To free the beltagain, fully retract the belt and then pullthe belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the belt is not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from death or seriousinjury.

22p006a

Take up slack

Keep as low on hipsas possible

Too high

Adjust the position of the lap andshoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips—not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulderportion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

� Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could causedeath or serious injuries due tosliding under the lap belt during acollision or other unintended event.Keep the lap belt positioned as lowon hips as possible.

� Do not place the shoulder belt un-der your arm.

61

22p005b

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulderanchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.To lower: Push in the lock release buttonand slide the anchor down.

After adjustment, make sure the anchor islocked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofyour shoulder. The belt should bekept away from your neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Failure todo so could reduce the amount ofprotection in an accident and causedeath or serious injuries in a colli-sion.

22p004a

To release the belt, press the bucklerelease button and allow the belt toretract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pullit out and check for kinks or twists. Thenmake sure it remains untwisted as it re-tracts.

62

—Seat belt extenderIf your seat belts cannot be fastened se-curely because they are not long enough,a personalized seat belt extender is avail-able from your Toyota dealer free ofcharge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer sothat the dealer can order the proper re-quired length for the extender. Bring theheaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-er measurement and selection of length.Additional ordering information is availableat your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,observe the following precautions.Failure to follow these instructionscould reduce the effectiveness of theseat belt restraint system in case ofan accident, increasing the chance ofdeath or serious injury.

� Remember that the extender pro-vided for you may not be safe whenused on a different vehicle, foranother person, or at a differentseating position than the one origi-nally intended.

22p205a

� If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without wearing the seat beltwhen using the extender in thedriver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-bag system will judge that the driv-er wears the seat belt even if notwearing it. In this case, the driver’sairbag may not activate correctly,causing death or serious injury inthe event of collision. Be sure towear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

� Make sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated whenusing the seat belt extender for thefront passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, disconnect the extendertongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt.Reconnect the seat belt extenderafter making sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated. If youuse the seat belt extender while the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, the front passengerairbag and side airbag on the frontpassenger side may not activatecorrectly, causing death or seriousinjury in the event of collision.

� Be sure to wear the seat belt with-out the seat belt extender if youcan fasten the seat belt without theextender.

63

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

22p008

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tab into the seat beltbuckle so that the “PRESS” signs onthe buckle release buttons of the ex-tender and the seat belt are both facingoutward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press onthe buckle release button on the extender,not on the seat belt. This helps preventdamage to the vehicle interior and extend-er itself.

As far as the seat belt extender on thefront passenger side is concerned, do notfail to disconnect the extender from theseat belt after the above operation in or-der to activate the front passenger airbagcorrectly when getting into the vehiclenext time.

When not in use, remove the extenderand store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt and the seat belt extend-er are not twisted.


� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from death or seriousinjury.

64

22p009b

There are seat belt pretensioners forboth front seats. They are designed tobe activated in response to a severefrontal impact.

When the sensor detects a severe frontalimpact, the front seat belts are quicklydrawn back by the retractor so that thebelts snugly restrain the occupants.

The front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er will not activate if no passenger isdetected in the front passenger seat bythe front passenger occupant classificationsystem. However, the front passenger’sseat belt pretensioner may activate if lug-gage is put on the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “—Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 81.)

The seat belt pretensioner and SRS air-bags may not operate together in all colli-sions.

22p237

The seat belt pretensioner system con-sists mainly of the following componentsand their locations are shown in the il-lustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indi-cator lights

4. Front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch

5. Front passenger occupant classificationsystem (ECU and sensors)

6. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

7. Airbag sensor assembly

—Seat belt pretensioners

65

The seat belt pretensioners are controlledby the airbag sensor assembly. The airbagsensor assembly consists of a safing sen-sor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-vated, an operating noise may be heardand a small amount of non−toxic gas maybe released. This does not indicate thata fire is occurring. This gas is normallyharmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners havebeen activated, the seat belt retractorsremain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or openthe seat belt pretensioner assemblies,airbag sensor or surrounding area orwiring. Failure to follow these instruc-tions may prevent the seat belt pre-tensioners from activating correctly,cause sudden operation of the systemor disable the system, which couldresult in death or serious injury. Con-sult your Toyota dealer about any re-pair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes can in-terfere with proper operation of theseat belt pretensioners in somecases.

� Installation of electronic devicessuch as a mobile two−way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

� Repairs on or near the front seatbelt retractor assemblies

� Modification of the suspension sys-tem

� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure or con-sole

22p010a

This indicator comes on when the “IG−ON” mode is enabled. It goes off afterabout 6 seconds. This means the seatbelt pretensioners are operating properly.

The warning light system monitors the air-bag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors,driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seatbelt buckle switch, front passenger occu-pant classification system, “AIRBAG ON”indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicatorlight, front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies,interconnecting wiring and power sources.(For details, see “Service reminder indica-tors and warning buzzers” on page 125.)

66

If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.

� The light does not come on when the“IG−ON” mode is enabled or remainson for more than 6 seconds.

� The light comes on while driving.

� If either front seat belt does not retractor can not be pulled out due to amalfunction or activation of the relevantseat belt pretensioner.

� The seat belt pretensioner assembly orsurrounding area has been damaged.

22p012a

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

� The front part of the vehicle (shadedin the illustration) was involved in anaccident that was not severe enough tocause the seat belt pretensioners tooperate.

� The seat belt pretensioner assembly orsurrounding area is scratched, cracked,or otherwise damaged.

22p013b

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) front airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for the driverand front passenger in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCEDAIRBAGS” designed based on US motorvehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). Theairbag system controls airbag deploymentpower for the driver and front passenger.The driver airbag system consists of thedriver’s seat position sensor, etc. Thefront passenger’s airbag system consistsof the front passenger occupant classifica-tion sensor, etc.

SRS airbags——SRS driver and front passenger airbags

67

In response to a severe frontal impact,the SRS front airbags work with the seatbelts to help reduce injury by inflating.The SRS front airbags help reduce injuriesmainly to the driver’s or front passenger’shead or chest caused by hitting the ve-hicle interior.

The SRS front passenger airbag will notactivate if there is no passenger sitting inthe front passenger seat. However, thefront passenger airbag may deploy if lug-gage is put in the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up, regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “—Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 81.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

� The SRS front airbag system is de-signed only as a supplement to theprimary protection of the driver andfront passenger seat belt systems.The driver and front passenger canbe killed or seriously injured by theinflating airbags if they do not wearthe available seat belts properly.During sudden braking just beforea collision, an unrestrained driveror front passenger can move for-ward into direct contact with orclose proximity to the airbag whichmay then deploy during the colli-sion. To ensure maximum protectionin an accident, the driver and allpassengers in the vehicle mustwear their seat belts properly. Wear-ing a seat belt properly during anaccident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. For in-structions and precautions concern-ing the seat belt system, see “Seatbelts” on page 58.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 86.

68

The SRS front airbags are designed todeploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-sions where the magnitude and durationof the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle exceeds the designed thresholdlevel.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if theseverity of the impact is above the de-signed threshold level, comparable to anapproximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collisionwhen the vehicle has the impact straightinto a fixed barrier that does not move ordeform.

However, this threshold velocity will beconsiderably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle orsign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if the vehicle is involved in anunderride collision (e.g. a collision inwhich the front of the vehicle “underrides”,or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisionswhere the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle is very close to the designed thresh-old level, the SRS front airbags and theseat belt pretensioners may not activatetogether.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

22p015c

Collision from the side Vehicle rollover

Collision from the rear

The SRS front airbags are generally notdesigned to inflate if the vehicle is in-volved in a side or rear collision, if itrolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed frontal collision. But, whenever acollision of any type causes sufficientforward deceleration of the vehicle, de-ployment of the SRS front airbags mayoccur.

22p016cHitting a curb, edgeof pavement orhard surface

Falling into or jump-ing over a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deployif a serious impact occurs to the under-side of your vehicle. Some examplesare shown in the illustration.

69

22p238

The SRS front airbag system consistsmainly of the following components andtheir locations are shown in the illustra-tion.

1. Front airbag sensors



4. Airbag module for front passenger (air-bag and inflator)

5. Passenger’s seat belt buckle switch


7. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

8. Driver’s seat position sensor


10. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of asafing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly moni-tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.If an impact results in a forward decelera-tion beyond the designed threshold level,the system triggers the airbag inflators. Atthis time a chemical reaction in the inflat-ors very quickly fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help restrain the froward mo-tion of the occupants. The front airbagsthen quickly deflate, so that there is noobstruction of the driver’s vision should itbe necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce aloud noise and release some smoke andresidue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

70

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, primarily to the head and chest, itmay also cause other, less severe injuriesto the face, chest, arms and hands. Theseare usually in the nature of minor burnsor abrasions and swelling, but the force ofa deploying airbag can cause more seri-ous injuries, especially if an occupant’shands, arms, chest or head is in closeproximity to the airbag module at the timeof deployment. This is why it is importantfor the occupant to: avoid placing anyobject or part of the body between theoccupant and the airbag module; sitstraight and well back into the seat; wearthe available seat belt properly; and sit asfar as possible from the airbag module,while still maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheelhub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hotfor several minutes after deployment, sodo not touch! The airbags inflate onlyonce. The windshield may be damaged byabsorbing some of the force of the inflat-ing airbag.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who istoo close to the steering wheel ordashboard during airbag deploymentcan be killed or seriously injured.Toyota strongly recommends that:

� The driver sit as far back as pos-sible from the steering wheel whilestill maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

� The front passenger sit as far backas possible from the dashboard.

� All vehicle occupants be properlyrestrained using the available seatbelts.

� If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without wearing the seat beltwhen using the extender in thedriver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-bag system will judge that the driv-er wears the seat belt even if notwearing it. In this case, the driver’sairbag may not activate correctly,causing death or serious injury inthe event of collision. Be sure towear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

For instructions and precautions con-cerning the seating position, see“—Front seat precautions” on page52.

71

22p020a

� Do not sit on the edge of the seator lean against the dashboard whenthe vehicle is in use, since thefront passenger airbag could inflatewith considerable speed and force.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, an airbag when it inflates,can be killed or seriously injured.Sit up straight and well back in theseat, and always use your seat beltproperly.

22p236

� Toyota strongly recommends thatall infants and children be placed inthe rear seat of the vehicle and beproperly restrained.

� Do not hold a child on your lap orin your arms. Use a child restraintsystem in the rear seat. For instruc-tions concerning the installation ofa child restraint system, see “Childrestraint” on page 86.

22p022c

� Do not put anything or any part ofyour body on or in front of thedashboard or steering wheel padthat houses the front airbag sys-tem. They might restrict inflation orcause death or serious injury asthey are projected rearward by theforce of the deploying airbags. Like-wise, the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

72

� Do not modify or remove any wir-ing. Do not modify, remove, strikeor open any components, such asthe steering wheel pad, steeringwheel, column cover, dashboardnear the front passenger airbag,front passenger airbag cover, frontpassenger airbag or airbag sensorassembly. Doing so may prevent thefront airbag system from activatingcorrectly, cause sudden front air-bags activation of the system ordisable the system, which could re-sult in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with a physical disability,consult your Toyota dealer. It maydangerously interfere with the SRSfront airbags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes can in-terfere with proper operation of theSRS front airbag system in somecases.



� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure, con-sole, steering column, steeringwheel or dashboard near the frontpassenger airbag

22p010a

This indicator comes on when the “IG−ON” mode is enabled. It goes off afterabout 6 seconds. This means the SRSfront airbags are operating properly.

The warning light system monitors the air-bag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors,driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seatbelt buckle switch, front passenger occu-pant classification system, “AIRBAG ON”indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicatorlight, front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies,interconnecting wiring and power sources.(For details, see “Service reminder indica-tors and warning buzzers” on page 125.)

73




The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light will come on if there is amalfunction in the front passenger occu-pant classification system.

22p023b


� The SRS front airbags have been in-flated.

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS front airbags to inflate.

� The pad section of the steering wheelor front passenger airbag cover(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the 12 volt batterycables before contacting your Toyotadealer.

74

22p024c

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-bags are designed to provide furtherprotection for the driver, front passen-ger and rear outboard passengers inaddition to the primary safety protec-tion provided by the seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, theSRS side airbags and curtain shield air-bags work with the seat belts to helpreduce injury by inflating. The SRS sideairbags help reduce injuries mainly to thedriver’s or front passenger’s chest and theSRS curtain shield airbags help reduceinjuries mainly to the driver’s, front pas-senger’s or rear outboard passenger’shead.

The SRS side airbag on the passengerseat will not activate if there is no pas-senger sitting in the front passenger seat.However, the side airbag on the passen-ger seat may deploy if luggage is put inthe seat, or the seat belt is buckled upregardless of the presence of the occu-pant in the seat. (As for the front passen-ger occupant classification system, see“—Front passenger occupant classificationsystem” on page 81.)

The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-vate even when the side airbags are notactivated.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

� The SRS side airbag and curtainshield airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver, frontpassenger and rear outside passen-ger seat belt systems. To ensuremaximum protection in an accident,the driver and all passengers in thevehicle must wear their seat beltsproperly. Wearing a seat belt prop-erly during an accident reduces thechances of death or serious injuryor being thrown out of the vehicle.For instructions and precautionsconcerning the seat belt system,see “Seat belts” on page 58.

—SRS side airbags andcurtain shield airbags

75

� Do not allow anyone to lean his/herhead or any part of his/her bodyagainst the door or the area of theseat, front pillar, rear pillar or roofside rail from which the SRS sideairbag and curtain shield airbagdeploy even if he/she is a childseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the SRS side air-bag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact of the deploy-ing airbag could cause death or se-rious injury to the occupant.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seats of the vehicle and prop-erly restrained. The rear seats arethe safest for infants and children.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page86.

22p025a

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system may not activate if thevehicle is subjected to a collision fromthe side at certain angles, or a collisionto the side of the vehicle body otherthan the passenger compartment asshown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are designed to inflate when thepassenger compartment area suffers a se-vere impact from the side.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

22p026cCollision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are generally not designed toinflate if the vehicle is involved in afront or rear collision, if it rolls over,or if it is involved in a low−speed sidecollision.

76

22p239

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system consists mainly of the fol-lowing components, and their locations areshown in the illustration.



3. Curtain shield airbag modules (airbag and inflator)


5. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

6. Curtain shield airbag sensors

7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors

8. Passenger’s seat belt buckle switch


The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system is controlled by the airbagsensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-sembly consists of a safing sensor andairbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side andcurtain shield airbag sensor and/or thecurtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) theside airbag inflators and/or the curtainshield airbag inflators. At this time achemical reaction in the inflators quicklyfills the airbags with non−toxic gas to helprestrain the lateral motion of the occu-pants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

77

Deployment of the airbags happen in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the frontand rear pillars, and roof side rail may behot for several minutes, but the airbagsthemselves will not be hot. The airbagsare designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags inflate with considerableforce. To reduce the possibility ofdeath or serious injury when they in-flate, the driver, front passenger andrear outside passengers must:

� Wear their seat belts properly.

� Remain properly seated with theirbacks upright and against the seatsat all times.

22p028d

� Do not allow anyone to lean againstthe door when the vehicle is in use,since the side airbag and curtainshield airbag could inflate with con-siderable speed and force. Other-wise, he/she may be killed or seri-ously injured. Special care shouldbe taken especially when you havea small child in the vehicle.

� Sit up straight and well back in theseat, distributing your weight even-ly in the seat. Do not apply exces-sive weight to the outer side of theseats with a side airbag, and to thefront pillar, rear pillar and roof siderail with a curtain shield airbag.

22p207a

� Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead closer to the area where theside airbag and curtain shield air-bag inflate, since these airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

78

� Do not allow anyone to kneel onthe passenger seat, facing the pas-senger’s side door, since the sideairbag and curtain shield airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

22p210

� Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead or hands out of windowssince the curtain shield airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

22p029d

� Do not attach a cup holder or anyother device or object on or aroundthe door. When the side airbag in-flates, the cup holder or any otherdevice or object will be thrown withgreat force or the side airbag maynot activate correctly, resulting indeath or serious injury. Likewise,the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

79

22p221a

� Do not attach a microphone or anyother device or object around thearea where the curtain shield airbagactivates such as on the windshieldglass, side door glass, front andrear pillars, roof side rail and assistgrips. When the curtain shield air-bag inflates, the microphone or oth-er device or object will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury.

� Do not hook a hanger, heavy orsharp pointed objects on the coathook. If the curtain shield airbaginflates, those items will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury. When you hang clothes,hang them on the coat hook direct-ly.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the parts where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats with sideairbags. Such changes may preventthe side airbag system from activat-ing correctly, disable the system orcause the side airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury.

� Do not disassemble or repair thefront and rear pillars and roof siderail containing the curtain shieldairbags. Such changes may disablethe system or cause the curtainshield airbags to inflate accidental-ly, resulting in death or serious in-jury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with a physical disability,consult your Toyota dealer. It maydangerously interfere with the SRSside airbags and curtain shield air-bags operation.

80

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system in some cases.



� Modification of the side structure ofthe passenger compartment

� Repairs made on or near the con-sole or front seat

22p010a

This indicator comes on when the “IG−ON” mode is enabled. It goes off afterabout 6 seconds. This means the SRSside airbags and curtain shield airbagsare operating properly.

The warning light system monitors the air-bag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors,driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seatbelt buckle switch, front passenger occu-pant classification system and indicatorlight, front passenger occupant classifica-tion system, “AIRBAG ON” indicator light,“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light, front pas-senger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat beltpretensioner assemblies, interconnectingwiring and power sources. (For details,see “Service reminder indicators andwarning buzzers” on page 125.)





81

22p030f


� Any of the SRS side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags have been inflated.

� The portion of the doors (shaded in theillustration) were involved in an acci-dent that was not severe enough tocause the SRS side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags to inflate.

� The surface of the seats with the sideairbag (shaded in the illustration) isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

� The portion of the front pillars, rearpillars or roof side rail garnishes (pad-ding) containing the curtain shield air-bags inside (shaded in the illustration)is scratched, cracked, or otherwisedamaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the 12 volt batterycables before contacting your Toyotadealer.

Your vehicle is equipped with a frontpassenger occupant classification sys-tem. This system detects the conditions1. through 4. in the table on page 84and based on these conditions activatesor deactivates the following systems;

� Front passenger airbag

� Side airbag on the front passengerseat

� Front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er

The system monitors the weight andload on the front passenger seat, andthe seat belt buckle switch to determineconditions 1. through 4.

In order for the system to detect theconditions correctly, do not do any ofthe following:

� Apply a heavy load to the front pas-senger seat.

� Attach a commercial seatback table,etc. to the front passenger seat seat-back.

� Put weight on the front passenger seatby putting your hands or feet on theseatback from the rear passenger seat.

—Front passenger occupantclassification system

82

22p241a

The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights indicate the actuation ofthe front passenger airbag, side airbagon the front passenger seat and frontpassenger’s seat belt pretensioner.

The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light will beilluminated when the “IG−ON” mode is en-abled with the condition 2 in the tableshown below.

If the front passenger occupant classifica-tion system determines that a person ofadult size sits in the front passenger seatbut the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, one of the following is likelyto have occurred:

� A rear passenger lifts the front passen-ger seat cushion with their legs.

� Objects are placed under the front pas-senger seat.

� The front passenger seatback is incontact with the rear seat.

To ensure the system correctly detects anadult sitting in the front passenger seat,make sure the above do not occur.

Make sure that the “AIRBAG ON” indicatorlight is illuminated when an adult isseated in the front passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is illumina-ted, ask the passenger to sit up straight,well back in the seat, and with the seatbelt worn correctly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light still remains illuminated, ei-ther ask the passenger to move to therear seat, or if that is not possible, movethe front passenger seat fully rearward.

The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights will be illuminated ini-tially when the “IG−ON” mode is en-abled. After about 4 seconds, they willgo off. After that, the front passengeroccupant classification system operatesand judges which indicator light be illu-minated.

83

22p240a

The SRS warning light and “AIRBAGOFF” indicator light will come on ifthere is a malfunction in the front pas-senger occupant classification system.

84

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Condition detected bythe front passengeroccupant classificationsystem

Indicator/ warning light Devices

“AIRBAG ON”and “AIRBAGOFF” indicator

lights

SRS warninglight

Frontpassenger’s

seat belt reminder light

Frontpassenger

airbag

Side airbag onthe front

passengerseat

Curtain shieldairbag in the

frontpassenger

side

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltpretensioner

1. Adult*1 “AIRBAG ON” Off Flashing*4 Activated

2. Child*2 or child restraint system*3 “AIRBAG OFF”*5 Off Flashing*4 Deactivated

Activated

Activated

3. Unoccupied Not illuminated Off Off Deactivated Deactivated

4. There is a malfunctionin the system “AIRBAG OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

*2: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/heras an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

*3: Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should onlybe installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 86 as for installing the child restraintsystem.)

*4: When the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.*5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, see “Child restraint” on page 86 as for installing the child restraint system properly.

85

CAUTION

To avoid potential death or seriousinjury when the front passenger occu-pant classification system does notdetect the conditions correctly, ob-serve the following:

� Make sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated whenusing the seat belt extender for thefront passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, disconnect the extendertongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt.Reconnect the seat belt extenderafter making sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated. If youuse the seat belt extender while the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, the front passengerairbag and side airbag on the frontpassenger side may not activatecorrectly, which could cause deathor serious injury in the event ofcollision.

� Do not recline the front passengerseat seatback so that it interfereswith a rear seat as it may cause the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light be il-luminated. If the seatback interfereswith the rear seat, return the seat-back to a position where it doesnot interfere with the rear seat.

Keep the front passenger seatbackas upright as possible when the ve-hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-back excessively may lessen the ef-fectiveness of the seat belt system.

� If an adult sits in the frontpassenger seat, the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light should be illumi-nated. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated, askthe passenger to sit up straight,well back in the seat, feet on thefloor, and with the seat belt worncorrectly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light still remains illumi-nated, either ask the passenger tomove to the rear seat, or if that isnot possible, move the frontpassenger seat fully rearward.

� Wear the seat belt properly.

� Make sure the front passenger’sseat belt tab has not been left in-serted into the buckle before some-one sits in the front passengerseat.

� Do not apply a heavy load to thefront passenger seat.

� Do not put weight on the front pas-senger seat by putting your handsor feet on the front passenger seat-back from the rear passenger seat.

� Do not let a rear passenger lift thefront passenger seat with their feetor press on the seatback with theirlegs.

� Do not put objects under the frontpassenger seat.

� Child restraint systems installed onthe rear seat should not contact thefront seatbacks.

86

� When it is unavoidable to install theforward−facing child restraint sys-tem on the front passenger seat,install the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in theproper order. (As for the installationorder, see “—Installation with3−point type seat belt” on page 89.)

� Do not remove the front seats.

� Do not kick the front passengerseat or subject it to severe impact.Otherwise, the SRS warning lightmay come on to indicate a malfunc-tion of the detection system. In thiscase, contact your Toyota dealer im-mediately.

The “AIRBAG ON” indicator light may beilluminated (the front passenger airbag andside airbag on the front passenger seatmay deploy) even if observing the abovecautions, when a child sits in, or a for-ward−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passenger seat. Re-fer to all the cautions in “SRS airbags” onpage 66 and “Child restraint” describedbelow.

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-propriate child restraint systems forchildren.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.and Canada now require the use of achild restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” onpage 58 for details.

CAUTION

� For effective protection in automo-bile accidents and sudden stops, achild must be properly restrained,using a seat belt or child restraintsystem depending on the age andsize of the child. Holding a child inyour arms is not a substitute for achild restraint system. In an acci-dent, the child can be crushedagainst the windshield, or betweenyou and the vehicle’s interior.

� Toyota strongly urges use of aproper child restraint system whichconforms to the size of the child,installed on the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, the childis safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the force ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag can cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

Child restraint——Child restraint precautions

87

� A forward−facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to beinstalled on the front passengerseat only when it is unavoidable.Always move the seat as far backas possible even if the “AIRBAGOFF” indicator light is illuminated,because the front passenger airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, thechild may be killed or seriously in-jured.

� On vehicles with side airbags andcurtain shield airbags, do not allowthe child to lean his/her head orany part of his/her body against thedoor or the area of the seat, frontor rear pillar or roof side rail fromwhich the side airbags or curtainshield airbags deploy even if thechild is seated in the child restraintsystem. It is dangerous if the sideairbag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

� Make sure you have complied withall installation instructions providedby the child restraint manufacturerand that the system is properly se-cured. If it is not secured properly,it may cause death or serious inju-ry to the child in the event of asudden stop or accident.

A child restraint system for a smallchild or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with the lap por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You mustcarefully consult the manufacturer’s in-structions which accompany child re-straint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a childrestraint system following the manufactur-er’s instructions about the appropriate ageand size of the child for the child restraintsystem.

Install the child restraint system correctlyfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer. General directions are alsoprovided under the following instructions.

The child restraint system should beinstalled on the rear seat. According toaccident statistics, the child is safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.

When not using the child restraint system,keep it secured with the seat belt or placeit somewhere other than the passengercompartment. This will prevent it from in-juring passengers in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

—Child restraint system

88

Child restraint systems are classified intothe following 3 types depending on thechild’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat(B) Convertible seat(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system followingthe instructions provided by its manufac-turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-curing the top strap of a child restraintsystem.

For instructions about how to use the an-chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” onpage 99.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap-proved for your vehicle may also be used.See “—Installation with child restraint low-er anchorages” on page 101.

22p031c

(A) Infant seat

22p032c

(B) Convertible seat

22p033c

(C) Booster seat

—Types of child restraintsystem

89

22p034c

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear−facing position only.

22p018c

CAUTION

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the impact ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag could cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

22p045e

� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the rear seat if it interfereswith the lock mechanism of thefront seats. Otherwise, the child orfront seat occupant(s) may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the rear rightseat.

—Installation with 3−pointtype seat belt

90

22p037c

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the belt. Keepthe lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt are not twisted.


� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from death or serious injury.Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-ately. Do not install the child re-straint system on the seat until theseat belt is fixed.

22p038c

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, makesure the belt is in the lock mode beforeletting the belt retract.

91

22p039c

3. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,let the shoulder belt retract as far asit will go to hold the infant seat secure-ly.

22p040c

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.

22p041c

4. To remove the infant seat, press thebuckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

92

22p042c

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-ward−facing or rear−facing position de-pending on the age and size of thechild. When installing, follow themanufacturer’s instructions about theapplicable age and size of the child aswell as directions for installing thechild restraint system.

Install the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat only when it is un-avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with afront passenger occupant classificationsystem. In order to activate the occupantclassification system correctly, install theforward−facing child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in the followingorder:

1. Turn the hybrid system to “IG−ON”.

2. Move the front passenger seat to therearward position.

3. Put the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat without puttingyour weight on the front passengerseat.

4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seatbelt buckle.

5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended. To hold the seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

6. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

CAUTION


7. Put a child on the child restraint sys-tem and secure the child, complyingwith the instructions provided by thechild restraint system manufacturer.

93

The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light shouldbe illuminated when the “IG−ON” mode isenabled and the child is in the child re-straint system after following these proce-dures. The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lightindicates the SRS front passenger airbagand side airbag on the passenger side willnot deploy. If the “AIRBAG ON” indicatorlight is illuminated, remove the child re-straint system and reinstall it with the hy-brid system in the “ACC” or “OFF” mode.If the “AIRBAG ON” indicator light is illu-minated when the “IG−ON” mode is en-abled, then the SRS front passenger air-bag and side airbag on the passengerside may deploy in an accident. Do notdrive the vehicle in this condition. Removethe child restraint system and contact yourToyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat. A forward−facing child re-straint system should only beinstalled on the front passengerseat when unavoidable. If you mustinstall the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat, put theseat in its most rearward position,and install the forward−facing childrestraint system in the proper or-der. Otherwise, the front passengeroccupant classification system can-not detect the presence of the childrestraint system and the front pas-senger airbag and side airbag onthe front passenger seat coulddeploy, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

22p043c

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the impact ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag could cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

94

22p044b

Move seatfully back



22p036f


� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the rear rightseat.

95

22p046c

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.

CAUTION




22p047c

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

96

22p048c

3. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

22p049c

CAUTION


22p050b

4. To remove the convertible seat, pressthe buckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

97

22p051c

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat must be used in for-ward−facing position only.

22p052a

Move seatfully back

CAUTION



98

22p053c

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Runthe lap and shoulder belt through oraround the booster seat and across thechild following the instructions providedby its manufacturer and insert the tabinto the buckle taking care not to twistthe belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctlyacross the child’s shoulder and that thelap belt is positioned as low as possibleon the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” onpage 58 for details.

CAUTION

� Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. The belt should bekept away from child’s neck, butnot falling off child’s shoulder.Otherwise, the child may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

� Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could causedeath or serious injuries due tosliding under the lap belt during acollision or other unintended event.Keep the lap belt positioned as lowon a child’s hips as possible.

� For child’s safety, do not place theshoulder belt under child’s arm.




99

22p050b

2. To remove the booster seat, press thebuckle release button and allow thebelt to retract.

—Using a top strap

22p055c

Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

22p056e

Anchor brackets

Symbol

Use the anchor brackets on the back ofthe rear seatback to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for eachrear seating position.

This symbol indicates the location of theanchor brackets.

100

22p063b

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the luggage cover (See“Luggage cover” on page 316.) andraise the head restraint to the upper-most lock position.

22p215

2. Open the cover of the anchor brack-et.

22p064e

3. Fix the child restraint system withthe seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 86.

101

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the child re-straint system is secure by pushingand pulling it in different directions.Follow all the installation instructionsprovided by its manufacturer.

22p076f

The lower anchorages for the child re-straint system interfaced with theFMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specificationare installed in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the clear-ance between the seat cushion and seat-back of both outside rear seats.

Child restraint system interfaced with theFMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specificationcan be fixed with these anchorages. Inthis case, it is not necessary to fix thechild restraint system with a seat belt onthe vehicle.

22p077h

Canadaonly

Type A

—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages

102

22p078g

Canadaonly

Type B

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLA-TION

1. Widen the gap between the seatcushion and seatback slightly andconfirm the position of the lower an-chorages below the symbol in theseatback.

2. Type A—Latch the hooks of lowerstraps onto the anchorages andtighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto theanchorages.

For owners in Canada

The symbol on a child restraint systemindicates the presence of a lower connec-tor system.

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap” on page 99.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

� When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages or thatthe seat belt is not caught.

� Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions to besure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.


103

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSSteering wheel and MirrorsTilt steering wheel 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vanity mirrors 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 3

104

22p058f

To change the steering wheel angle,hold the steering wheel, push down thelock release lever, tilt the steeringwheel to the desired angle and pushthe lever up to lock the steering wheelin position.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving. Doingso may cause the driver to mishan-dle the vehicle and an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

� After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down to makesure it is locked in position.

When you move the steering wheel, anelectrical motor noise may be heard. Thisis the power steering motor noise, and isnot a malfunction.

22p059a

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the side of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the outsiderear view mirror on the passenger’s sidebecause it is a convex mirror. Any objectseen in a convex mirror will look smallerand farther away than when seen in a flatmirror.

When you touch the rear window defoggerswitch, the heater panels in the outsiderear view mirrors will quickly clear themirror surface. (See “Rear window andoutside rear view mirror defoggers” onpage 118.)

Tilt steering wheel Outside rear view mirrors—

105

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle thevehicle and an accident may occurresulting in death or serious inju-ries.

� Since the mirror surfaces can gethot, keep your hands off them whenthe defogger switch is on.

22p138a

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror tobe adjustedPush the switch to “L” (left) or “R”(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirrorPush the switch in the desired direc-tion.

The mirrors can be adjusted when thehybrid system is in “ACC” or “IG−ON”mode.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de−icer to freethe mirror.

—Power rear view mirrorcontrol

106

—Folding rear view mirrors

22p066a

The rear view mirrors can be foldedbackward for parking in compact areas.

To fold the rear view mirror, push back-ward.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors foldedbackward. Both the driver and pas-senger side rear view mirrors mustbe extended and properly adjustedbefore driving.

22p061a

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

To reduce glare from headlights of thevehicle behind you during night driving,operate the lever on the lower edge ofthe mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greaterclarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you alsolose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

Anti−glare inside rear viewmirror

107

22p235

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti−glare function. The function is designedto reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving.

When the hybrid system is in the “IG−ON”mode, the inside rear view mirror alwaysturns on in the automatic function mode.

The green indicator illuminates to showyou that the function is on.

In automatic function mode, if the mirrordetects light from the headlights of thevehicle behind you, the mirror surfacedarkens slightly to reduce the reflectedlight.

To turn off the automatic function, pushthe “�” switch.

To turn on the automatic function again,push the “ | ” switch.

Adjust it before driving so that the rearview is in the best condition.

When the inside air temperature is low, itmay take a little longer for the mirror todarken in response to the detection ofheadlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

22p214a

To ensure correct functioning of ananti−glare mirror sensor located on theback side of the mirror, do not touchor cover the sensor with your finger ora piece of cloth, etc.

Auto anti−glare inside rearview mirror

108

22p098b

To use the vanity mirror, swing downthe sun visor and slide the cover.

22p223

To turn on the vanity light, slide theswitch.

The vanity light switch has the followingpositions:

“ON”—Turns the light on when you swingdown the sun visor. However, if the visorhas been slid out, the light may not comeon.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

Vanity mirrors

109

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSLights, Wipers and DefoggerHeadlights and turn signals 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flashers 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front fog lights 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior lights 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal lights 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage compartment light 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key slot lights 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window wiper and washer 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers 118. . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 4

110

23p137a

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or allof the lights in position 1

They automatically turn on or off depend-ing on the darkness of the surroundings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2to turn on the headlights if they are need-ed immediately when entering a dark tun-nel, parking structure, etc.

23p124_1

The automatic light control sensor is onthe top of the driver’s side instrumentpanel.

Do not place anything on the instrumentpanel, and/or do not affix anything on thewindshield to block this sensor.

Automatic light cut off system

The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the hybridsystem off. To turn them on again, pressthe “POWER” switch twice from the offsetting to select the “IG−ON” mode with-out depressing the brake pedal or actuatethe headlight switch. If you are going topark for over one week, make sure theheadlight switch is off.

When the headlight switch is turned to thefirst or second clickstop, the brightness ofthe instrument cluster will be reducedslightly unless the instrument panel lightcontrol dial is turned fully on.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the switch onlonger than necessary when the hy-brid system is not running.

Headlights and turn signals(with automatic light control system)

111

Daytime running light system

The headlights turn on at reduced intensi-ty when the parking brake is released withthe hybrid system started, even with thelight switch in the “OFF” position.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob tothe position 1.

To turn off the daytime running light sys-tem, twist the knob to the position 2 orposition 3 with the headlights on or turnthe hybrid system off.

23p109b

High−Low beams—For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

The high beam flasher works even whenthe headlight switch is off.

23p110b

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.

The hybrid system must be in the “IG−ON” mode.

The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

112

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out. See “Replacing lightbulbs—” on page 422.

23p001e

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

Automatic light cut off system

The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the hybridsystem off. To turn them on again, pressthe “POWER” switch twice from the offsetting to select the “IG−ON” mode with-out depressing the brake pedal or actuatethe headlight switch. If you are going topark for over one week, make sure theheadlight switch is off.


NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onlonger than necessary when the hy-brid system is not running.

Headlights and turn signals(without automatic light control system)

113

23p003d

High−Low beams—For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

The high beam flasher works even whenthe headlight switch is off.

23p004d

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.


The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out. See “Replacing lightbulbs—” on page 422.

114

23p005a

To turn on the emergency flashers,push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turnthem off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warnother drivers if your vehicle must bestopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-sible.

The turn signal light switch will not workwhen the emergency flashers are operat-ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onlonger than necessary when the hy-brid system is not running.

23p138

To adjust the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the dial.


Emergency flashers Instrument panel light control

115

23p111

To turn on the fog lights, twist theband of the headlight switch lever tothe position of the fog light. The foglights come on only when the head-lights are on low beam.

The band automatically returns to the“OFF” position after you release it.

23p126

Front

Rear

To turn on the interior light, slide theswitch.

The interior light switch has the followingpositions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when anydoor is opened. The light remains on for15 seconds when all the doors are closed.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

With the switch in the “DOOR” position,the light comes on when any of the doorsis opened or when you get close to thefront door, carrying the smart key. After allthe doors are closed, the light remains onfor about 15 seconds and then fades out.

However, in the following cases, the lightgoes off immediately.

� All the doors are closed when the hy-brid system is in “ACC” or “IG−ON”.

� All the doors are closed and locked.

When all the doors are unlocked, the lightcomes on for about 15 seconds and thenfades out, even if the door is not opened.

Front fog lights (on some models) Interior lights

116

23P012c

To turn on the personal light, push theswitch. To turn it off, push the switchagain.

23p107

To turn on the luggage compartmentlight, push the switch upwards. To turnit off, push the switch downwards.

The light is located on the left side of theluggage compartment.

Even if you push the switch upwards, thelight turns off automatically when youclose the back door.

23p125

For easy access to the key slot, the keyslot lights come on while the interiorlight is on.

Personal lights Luggage compartment light Key slot lights

117

23p008f

To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield,push the lever up and release it.

Twist the interval adjuster upward toincrease the wiping time interval be-tween sweeps, and downward to de-crease it.

The wiper lever must be in the “INT” posi-tion.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the levertoward you and release it.

If the windshield wipers are off, they willoperate a couple of times after the washersquirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 422.

In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch theglass.

23p123a

To turn on the rear window wiper, twistthe lever knob upward.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Normal

To squirt washer fluid on the rear window,twist the knob upward or downward as faras it will go (position 3 or 4). The knobautomatically returns from these positionsafter you release it. The rear window wip-er operates while the washer squirts.

Windshield wipers and washer

Rear window wiper andwasher

118

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 422.

NOTICE

Do not operate the rear wiper if therear window is dry. It may scratch theglass. 24p116

Type 1

23p009c

Type 2

To defog or defrost the rear window,push the “CLIMATE” button to displayair conditioner screen and touch theswitch.

Operating the steering switch can also de-fog or defrost the rear window. (See “Cli-mate remote control” on page 299.)


The thin heater wires on the inside of therear window will quickly clear the surface.An indicator will come on to indicate thedefogger is operating.

Touch the switch once again to turn thedefogger off.

The system will automatically shut off af-ter the defogger has operated about 15minutes.

Rear window and outside rearview mirror defoggers

119

CAUTION

Since the mirror surface can get hot,do not touch them when the switchis on.

Make sure you turn the defogger off whenthe window is clear. Leaving the defoggeron for a long time could cause the 12 voltbattery to discharge. The defogger is notdesigned for drying rain water or for melt-ing snow.

If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-ly coated with ice, use a spray de−icerbefore operating the switch.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

121

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSGauges, Meters and Service reminder indicatorsFuel gauge 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer and two trip meters 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Km/h or MPH button 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 5

122

24p001b

The gauge indicates the approximatequantity of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

Nearly full–Indicator at “F”Nearly empty–Indicator at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over1/4 full.

When you refuel on a slope, the indicatormay not show the correct level.

When you refuel less than about 11.4 L(3.0 gal., 2.5 lmp.gal.), the fuel indicatormay not change.

After the 12 volt battery is reconnected,one segment will flash for a while.

Depending on the ambient temperature,the fuel quantity is less than 45 L (11.9gal., 9.9 lmp.gal.) even at “F”. However,this does not affect the fuel consumptionand the remaining fuel ratio indicated onthe gauge. (For details, see “Fuel” onpage 320.)

If the fuel gauge display flashes, theremay be a problem in the system. In thiscase, contact your Toyota dealer as soonas possible.

24p002b

Low fuel level indicatorlight

Blink

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the lowfuel level indicator light blinks, fill the fueltank as soon as possible.

Fuel gauge

123

25p127a

Type 1

24p109a

Type 2

At the first blinking of the light, the masterwarning light in the instrument clustercomes on and the message appears onthe multi−information display to remind thedriver to fill fuel.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel levelindicator light may come on earlier thanusual.

24p004e

This meter displays the odometer andtwo trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two differentdistances independently driven sincethe last time each trip meter was setto zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculatethe fuel economy and the other tomeasure the distance on each trip. Alltrip meter data is cancelled if the elec-trical power source is disconnected.

Odometer and two trip meters

124

3. Trip meter reset button—Resets thetwo trip meters to zero, and alsochange the meter display.

To change the meter display, quicklypush and release the button. The meterdisplay changes in the order from theodometer to trip meter A to trip meterB, then back to the odometer eachtime you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-play the meter A reading, then pushand hold the button until the meter isset to zero. The same process can beapplied for resetting the trip meter B.

Km/h or MPH button

24p115

You can switch the display betweenkm/h and MPH by pressing the button.

125

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a)

or

(red indicator and buzzer)If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(yellow indicator)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If red brake system warning light is also on, stop imme-diately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(c)(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(e) See multi−information display.

(f) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If red brake system warning light is also on, stop imme-diately and contact Toyota dealer.

If any warning comes on, the hybrid system may not start by pushing the “POWER” switch. In that case, push it once again.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

126

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(g) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(h) Close all doors.

(i) Fill up tank.

(j) Replace engine oil

(k) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If red brake system warning light is also on, stop imme-diately and contact Toyota dealer.

(l) Adjust tire inflation pressure. If light remains on, contact Toyota dealer.

(m) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

(n) P position reminderbuzzer

Push the “P” position switch.

If any warning comes on, the hybrid system may not start by pushing the “POWER” switch. In that case, push it once again.

127

(a) Brake System Warning Lights andBuzzer

These lights come on in the followingcases when the “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

RED WARNING LIGHT

� When the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on when the “IG−ON”mode is enabled, even after the parkingbrake is released.

If the vehicle speed rises above 5 km/h(3 mph) while the parking brake is ap-plied, a buzzer sounds.

� When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue drivingnormally when the brake fluid level islow.

YELLOW WARNING LIGHT

� When the regenerative brake systemis fails...

RED OR YELLOW WARNING LIGHT

� When the hydraulic brake systemfails...

When the yellow warning light comes on,it is no problem to continue driving. How-ever, if the red warning light comes on,it indicates a serious problem and you cancontinue driving no longer.

Have your vehicle checked at yourToyota dealer in the following cases:

� The lights do not come on even if theparking brake is applied when the“READY” light is on.

� The lights do not come on even if the“POWER” switch is pressed with theparking brake released.

A red or yellow warning light turning onbriefly during operation does not indicatea problem.

CAUTION

If any of the following conditions oc-curs, immediately stop your vehicle ata safe place and contact your Toyotadealer.

� The red warning light does not turnoff even after the parking brake isreleased while the hybrid system isrunning.

� The red warning light comes on orbuzzer sounds continuously.

In either case, this can indicate thatthe brakes may not work properly andyour stopping distance will becomelonger. Depress the brake pedal firmlyand bring the vehicle to an immediatestop.

� The brake system warning light re-mains on together with the “ABS”and “VSC” warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system and vehicle stabilitycontrol system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

In the following case, drive directly tothe nearest Toyota dealer.

� The yellow warning light comes onwhile driving.

128

Any of the following conditions may oc-cur, but do not indicate the malfunc-tion:

� The red and yellow warning light maystay on for about 60 seconds after thehybrid system is started. It is normalif it turns off after a while.

� Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the red and yellow warn-ing light. It is normal if the light turnsoff and the buzzer stops sounding aftera few seconds.

� You may hear a small sound in theengine compartment after the hybridsystem is started or the brake pedal isdepressed repeatedly. This is a pumppulsating sound of the brake system,and it is not a malfunction.

� You may hear a motor sound in theengine compartment when the brakepedal is depressed with the hybrid sys-tem off.

� The brake pedal stroke may be shortwhen you press the “POWER” switchwith the brake pedal depressed.

� You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment when the driver’s door isopened or the brake pedal is de-pressed with the hybrid system turnedoff. However, this does not indicate anytrouble.

� You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment after the hybrid system isturned on or off. However, this doesnot indicate any trouble.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tobuckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the “IG−ON” mode is enabled, thereminder light flashes and the buzzersounds if the driver’s seat belt is not fas-tened. Unless the driver fastens the belt,the light continues flashing and the buzzersounds 4 to 8 seconds.

If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h(12 mph) without the belt fastened, abuzzer sounds.

(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder Light and Buzzer

This light acts as a reminder to have thefront passenger buckle up the seat belt.

Once the “IG−ON” mode is enabled, thereminder light flashes if a passenger sitsin the front passenger seat and does notfasten the seat belt. Unless the front pas-senger fastens the belt, the light continuesflashing.

If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h(12 mph) without the belt fastened, abuzzer sounds.

If luggage or other load is placed on thefront passenger seat, depending on itsweight, causing the reminder light to flashand buzzer to sound.

129

(d) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the “IG−ON”mode is enabled and goes off after thehybrid system starts. This means thatthe warning light system is operatingproperly.

If the lamp remains on or the lampcomes on while driving, first check thefollowing:

� Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-ately.

This case is a temporary malfunction. Themalfunction indicator lamp will go off aftertaking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even afterseveral trips, contact your Toyota deal-er as soon as possible.

� There is a problem somewhere in theengine, hybrid system, throttle controlsystem or warning light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

Emissions inspection and maintenance(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a state emis-sion inspection if the malfunction indicatorlamp remains on. Contact your Toyotadealer to check your vehicle’s emissioncontrol system and OBD (On−Board Diag-nostics) system before taking your vehiclefor the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions inspection andmaintenance (I/M) programs” on page 394.

(e) Master Warning Light ( )If the master warning light comes on, thewarning light for the faulty system is high-lighted or the message such as “Pleasepress “P” to engage Park.” and “The bat-teries will not be charged if the transaxleis in Neutral N.” appears on the multi−in-formation display. (See “Service reminderindicators and warning buzzers— —Multi−information display” on page 133 or “Pre-cautions for use” on page 14 or “Fuelgauge” on page 122 for instructions.)

(f) “ABS” Warning Light

The light comes on when the “IG−ON”mode is enabled. If the anti−lock brakesystem and the brake assist system workproperly, the light turns off after the“READY” light comes on. Thereafter if thesystem malfunctions, the light comes onagain.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is on), theanti−lock brake system does not operate,but the brake system still operates con-ventionally.

If any of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the parts monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible soservice the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when the“IG−ON” mode is enabled, or the lightremains on after the “READY” lightcomes on.

� The light comes on while you are driv-ing.

A warning light turning on briefly duringoperation does not indicate a problem.

130

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the red brake systemwarning light, immediately stop yourvehicle at a safe place and contactyour Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system function and brake as-sist function will fail but also the ve-hicle will become extremely unstableduring braking.

Any of the following conditions may oc-cur, but does not indicate the malfunc-tion:� The light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the hybrid system isstarted. It is normal if it turns off aftera while.

� Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the light. It is normal ifit turns off after a few seconds.

(g) SRS Warning LightThis indicator comes on when the “IG−ON” mode is enabled. It goes off afterabout 6 seconds. This means the SRSfront airbags, side and curtain shieldairbags and seat belt pretensioners areoperating properly.The warning light system monitors the air-bag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors,driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seatbelt buckle switch, front passenger occu-pant classification system, “AIRBAG ON”indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicatorlight, front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies,interconnecting wiring and power sources.





(h) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the doorsare completely closed.

(i) Low Fuel Level Indicator Light

This light blinks when the fuel level in thetank becomes nearly empty. Fill up thetank as soon as possible.

At the first blinking of the light, the mes-sage appears on the display to remind thedriver to fill fuel.

Contact your Toyota dealer if the fill fuelgauge blinks.

131

(j) Engine Oil Replacement ReminderLight (for vehicles sold in theU.S.A.)

This light acts as a reminder to replacethe engine oil.

This light will come on when the “IG−ON”mode is enabled, and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500miles) after engine oil replacement, thislight illuminates for about 3 seconds andthen flashes for about 12 seconds whenthe hybrid system is in the “IG−ON”mode. If you continue driving without en-gine oil replacement, and if the drivingrange exceeds 8000 km (5000 miles), thelight will come on after the “IG−ON” modeis enabled. The light will remain on there-after.

If the light is flashing, we recommend thatyou replace the engine oil at an earlyopportunity depending on the driving androad conditions. If the light comes on,replace the oil as soon as possible.

The system must be reset after the en-gine oil replacement. Reset the system bythe following procedure:

1. Press the “POWER” switch to the“OFF” mode with the odometer readingshown. (For details, see “Odometer andtwo trip meters” on page 123.)

2. Press the “POWER” switch twice toselect the “IG−ON” mode while holdingdown the trip meter reset button.

Hold down the button for at least 5 sec-onds. The odometer indicates “000000”and the light goes off.

If the system fails to reset, the light willremain flashing.

(k) “VSC” Warning Light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle stability controlsystem.

The light will come on when the “IG−ON”mode is enabled and will go off after the“READY” light comes on.

If the light comes on while driving, thesystem does not work. However, as con-ventional braking operates when applied,there is no problem to continue your driv-ing.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer:

� The warning light does not come onafter the “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

� The warning light remains on after the“READY” light comes on.

� The warning light comes on while youare driving.

132

CAUTION

If the “VSC” warning light remains ontogether with the red brake systemwarning light, immediately stop yourvehicle at a safe place and contactyour Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the vehicle sta-bility control system will fail but alsothe vehicle will become extremely un-stable during braking.

(l) Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light comes on when the “IG−ON”mode is enabled. If the tire pressurewarning system works properly and tireinflation pressure is appropriate, the lightgoes off after a few seconds.

This light comes on or flashes in the fol-lowing cases when the “IG−ON” mode isenabled.

� When the low tire inflation pressureis detected while driving...

If any tire has low inflation pressure,the light comes on.

The light goes off after the tire inflationpressure is adjusted to a specified lev-el.

� When initializing the system...

When ready to be initialized, the lightblinks three times.

� When the system malfunctions...

If the system malfunctions, the lightblinks.

Although it is no problem to continuedriving, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as pos-sible.

(m) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer acts as a reminder to removethe key if you open the driver’s door whenthe hybrid system is off and the key isinserted into the key slot.

(n) P Position Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer will sound if the driver’s dooris opened while the hybrid transaxle is in“N”, “D” or “B”.

133

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER INDICA-TORS (except the low fuel level indica-tor light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the doors.The open door warning light shouldcome on.

3. Close the door.The open door warning light should gooff.

4. Press the “POWER” switch twice with-out pressing the brake pedal to selectthe “IG−ON” mode. At this time, all thebulbs are checked in self−diagnosismode.All the service reminder indicators ex-cept the open door warning light comeon. The yellow brake system, “ABS”and “VSC” warning lights turn off afterthe “READY” light comes on.

There may be the case that the yellowbrake system, “ABS” and “VSC” warninglights stay on for about 60 seconds afterthe hybrid system is started. It is normalif they go out after a while.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-ing buzzer does not function as describedabove, have it checked by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.

24p117

Type 1

24p006e

Type 2

If an error occurs in the system, thewarning message and icon appear.

For details on the warning display andhow to remedy the system, see the de-scription on the following pages.

—Multi−information display

134

If the indicator comes on... Do this.

(a) Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b) Stop and check.

(c) Stop and check.

(d) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(e) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(f) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

135

(a) Charging System Warning Light

When there are problems in the chargingsystem while the hybrid system is running,the warning light comes on.

NOTICE

When the charging system warninglight comes on while the hybrid sys-tem is running, malfunctions mayhave occurred. If the warning lightcomes on, immediately stop the ve-hicle in a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

(b) Low Engine Oil Pressure WarningLight

This light warns that the engine oil pres-sure is too low.

If it stays on while you are driving, pulloff the road to a safe place and stop theengine immediately. Call a Toyota dealeror qualified repair shop for assistance.

The light may come on when the oil levelis extremely low. It is not designed toindicate low oil level, and the oil levelmust be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with thewarning light on—even for one block.It may ruin the engine.

(c) High Coolant Temperature Warning Light

The light operates to warn that the hybridsystem is almost overheating.

If it comes on while you are driving, stopthe vehicle and check your hybrid system.For detailed instructions, see “If your ve-hicle overheats” on page 364.

Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

� Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

� Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

NOTICE

� Do not remove the thermostat inthe cooling system as this maycause the hybrid system to over-heat. The thermostat is designed tocontrol the flow of coolant to keepthe temperature of the hybrid sys-tem within the specified operatingrange.

� Continued driving with the light oncould result in the overheating ofhybrid system.

136

(d) Electric Power Steering SystemWarning Light

This light comes on when the powersteering control system fails.

CAUTION

If this light comes on, take your ve-hicle to the Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. In this case, you may feelthe heavy steering wheel maneuver-ing. Drive your vehicle while grippingthe steering wheel firmly.

(e) Hybrid System Warning Light ( )This light comes on if there is a problemin the electric motor, inverter unit, hybridbattery, etc.

If this light is on, stop your vehicle in asafe place immediately and contact yourToyota dealer.

Even if the hybrid system warning lightcomes on, you can temporarily increasethe vehicle speed by depressing the ac-celerator pedal. Immediately pull up yourvehicle to a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

(f) Hybrid Battery Warning Light

This light comes on in the followingcases.

a. The hybrid battery voltage drops whenthe hybrid transaxle is left in “N” position.

The system works properly if you put thehybrid transaxle in “P” position and thelight goes off.

b. The hybrid battery is discharged.

If this light comes on with the “READY”light on in case of b., stop your vehiclein a safe place and contact your Toyotadealer.

(g) Automatic Headlight Leveling Sys-tem Warning Light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the automatic headlightleveling system.

If it comes on, have your vehicle checkedby your Toyota dealer.

137

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLS“POWER” switch, Transmission and Parking brakePush button start system 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid transaxle 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle stability control system 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire pressure warning system 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 6

138

25p118

The push button start system is used tostart or stop the hybrid system and select“ACC”, “IG−ON” or “OFF” mode. (See“—Selecting the push button start systemmode” on page 140 and “How to start thehybrid system” on page 350.) The systemcontains the following components.

1. “POWER” switch

2. Key slot

3. Brake pedal

4. Electronic shift lever

21p006a

Your vehicle keys and the key slot aredifferent shapes from conventional ones.

Keep the following in mind when operatingthe key:

� When inserting the key, be sure topush it in all the way.

� When pulling out the key, be carefulbecause it will be pushed out by thespring and it might fly out.

� If the key cannot be pulled out, pushit in all the way again, then pull it out.

CAUTION

Do not put your finger into the keyslot. Your finger might be injured.

NOTICE

Observe the following instructions, orthe key mechanism might be damagedand will not work properly.

� The key should be operated with aclean hand and fingers.

� Do not insert the key forcibly.

� Do not insert any key other thangenuine formal keys into the keyslot.

� Do not pull out the key forciblywhen it cannot be removed.

� Do not put water, oil, foreign ob-jects, etc. into the key slot.

� Do not insert a wet, oily or dam-aged key into the key slot.

� Do not affix a sticker on the key.

� Do not insert the key in the wrongway.

Push button start system— —Key slot

139

� Do not pull out the key ring whenremoving the key out of the keyslot.

Should you find anything unusual,contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. 25p113

Press the “POWER” switch slowly andsurely. Quick operation may not activatethe desired mode.

CAUTION

� Do not press the switch while driv-ing, except in an emergency.

� In hot weather, the switch surfacemay get hot. Take care not to getburned.

NOTICE

Observe the following instructions orthe push button start system may notwork properly.

� The switch should be operated witha clean finger. Do not use an oilyor dirty finger.

� Be careful not to spill water or oth-er liquid on the switch.

In the following conditions, contactyour Toyota dealer as soon as pos-sible.

� If the indicator on the switchflashes in amber, the system maybe malfunctioning. Once you turnthe power off, it may not turn onagain.

� If you find anything unusual in theswitch function, refrain from usingthe vehicle.

In the following condition, have yourvehicle inspected by your Toyota deal-er.

� The indicator light on the “POWER”switch does not come on when theclearance lights are turned on.

—“POWER” switch

140

25P105b

Without depressing the brake pedal

Carrying a smart key allows you to op-erate the “POWER” switch without thekey being inserted into the key slot.

Each time you press the “POWER”switch briefly without the brake pedaldepressed, the hybrid system modechanges in the order of “OFF”, “ACC”,“IG−ON” and then back to “OFF”.

The smart function can be set to becomeinoperative using the smart cancel switch.For details, see “Deactivating the smartfunction” on page 34.

1) “ACC” (Green indicator is turned on)

Accessories such as the radio operate.

Pressing the “POWER” switch briefly with-out depressing the brake pedal in the“OFF” mode turns on this mode.

In the “ACC” mode, pressing the “POW-ER” switch briefly while depressing thebrake pedal will start the hybrid system.

If you leave your vehicle in the “ACC”mode for about an hour, the hybrid systemis automatically turned off.

2) “IG−ON” (Amber indicator is turnedon)

All accessories are operable.

Pressing the “POWER” switch briefly with-out depressing the brake pedal in the“ACC” mode turns on this mode.

In the “IG−ON” mode, pressing the “POW-ER” switch briefly while depressing thebrake pedal will start the hybrid system.However, if “N” position is selected, thehybrid system will be turned to the “OFF”mode.

3) “OFF” (Indicator is turned off)

The hybrid system is off.

You may hear a motor sound in the en-gine compartment for a few seconds afterthe system is turned off and about 90seconds have passed.

The hybrid vehicle immobilizer system isautomatically set. See “Hybrid vehicle im-mobilizer system” on page 21.

—Selecting the push buttonstart system mode (with smart function—on some models)

141

25P106b

With the brake pedal depressed

The hybrid system will start and stopby pressing the “POWER” switch brieflywith the brake pedal depressed.

You may hear a motor sound in the en-gine compartment when the brake pedal isdepressed with the hybrid system off.

1) “START” (Amber indicator comes onfor a few seconds.)

The hybrid system is ready to operateand all accessories are operable. (“IG−ON”)

Press the “POWER” switch with the brakepedal depressed.

For starting tips, see “How to start thehybrid system—” on page 350.

If in an emergency, you must turn thehybrid system off while the vehicle ismoving, press the “POWER” switch formore than 3 seconds. At this time, the“ACC” mode and shift position “N” areautomatically enabled.


The hybrid system is off.


The hybrid vehicle immobilizer system isautomatically set. See “Hybrid vehicle im-mobilizer system” on page 21.

Approximately 5 hours after the hybridsystem is turned off, you may hear asound coming from underneath the lug-gage compartment for several minutes.This is normal operation and does notindicate a malfunction. (See “Leak detec-tion pump” on page 452.)

NOTICE

� The hybrid system cannot bestarted when the shift position is in“N”. Be sure to put it in “P” andthen start the system.

� Do not leave the hybrid system in“ACC” or “IG−ON” for a long time.The 12 volt battery will discharge.

� The hybrid mode in which the bat-tery is discharged or disconnectedis retained in memory, and thatmode is turned on when power isapplied.

When you leave your vehicle, be sure toturn the “POWER” switch off and carry thesmart key.

If you get out of your vehicle while carry-ing a key without turning off the “POWER”switch and then close the door, a warningtone sounds inside and beeps sound out-side.

142

INFORMATION

You can insert a genuine key while inthe “IG−ON” mode or with the hybridsystem starting. Do not insert any keyother than genuine keys. 25p103a

Without depressing the brake pedal

Each time you press the “POWER”switch briefly without the brake pedaldepressed, the hybrid system modechanges in the order of “OFF”, “ACC”,“IG−ON” and then back to “OFF”.

1) “ACC” (Green indicator is turned on)

Accessories such as the radio operate.

Pressing the “POWER” switch briefly with-out depressing the brake pedal in the“OFF” mode turns on this mode.

The key can be removed at this position.The hybrid system is automatically turnedoff.

In the “ACC” mode, pressing the “POW-ER” switch briefly while depressing thebrake pedal will start the hybrid system.

If you leave your vehicle in the “ACC”mode for about an hour, the hybrid systemis automatically turned off.

2) “IG−ON” (Amber indicator is turnedon)

All accessories are operable.

Pressing the “POWER” switch briefly with-out depressing the brake pedal in the“ACC” mode turns on this mode.

In the “IG−ON” mode, pressing the“POWER” switch briefly while depressingthe brake pedal will start the hybrid sys-tem. However, if “N” position is selected,the hybrid system will be turned in the“OFF” mode.


The hybrid system is off. The key canbe removed at this position.


Once you remove the key, the hybrid ve-hicle immobilizer system is automaticallyset. See “Hybrid vehicle immobilizer sys-tem” on page 21.

—Selecting the push buttonstart system mode(without smart function)

143

25p104a

With the brake pedal depressed

The hybrid system will start and stopby pressing the “POWER” switch brieflywith the brake pedal depressed.


1) “START” (Amber indicator comes onfor a few seconds)

The hybrid system is ready to operateand all accessories are operable. (“IG−ON”)

Insert the key and press the “POWER”switch briefly with the brake pedal de-pressed.

For starting tips, see “How to start thehybrid system—” on page 350.

If, in an emergency, you must turn thehybrid system off while the vehicle ismoving, press the “POWER” switch morethan 3 seconds. At this time, the “ACC”mode and shift position “N” are automati-cally enabled.


The hybrid system is off. The key canbe removed at this position.


Once you remove the key, the hybrid ve-hicle immobilizer system is automaticallyset. See “Hybrid vehicle immobilizer sys-tem” on page 21.

Approximately 5 hours after the hybridsystem is turned off, you may hear asound coming from underneath the lug-gage compartment for several minutes.This is normal operation and does notindicate a malfunction. (See “Leak detec-tion pump” on page 452.)

NOTICE

� The hybrid system cannot bestarted when the shift position is in“N”. Be sure to put it in “P” andthen start the system.

� Do not leave the hybrid system in“ACC” or “IG−ON” for a long time.The 12 volt battery will discharge.

� The hybrid mode in which the bat-tery is discharged or disconnectedis retained in memory, and thatmode is turned on when power isapplied.

144

Hybrid transaxleYour hybrid transaxle has an electronicshift lever system to minimize incorrectoperation. This means you can only shiftto other position from “P” when the brakepedal is depressed.

With the following improper shifting, therejection function operates and a beepsounds so the hybrid transaxle cannot beshifted.

(i) When you attempt to shift the transaxlefrom the “P” position without depress-ing the brake pedal.

(ii) When you push the “P” switch whiledriving.

(iii) When you operate the shift lever from“D” to “R” or vice versa while the ve-hicle is moving.

(iv) When you operate the shift lever to “B”from any position other than “D”.

In case of (i), the transaxle remains in“P”. In case of (ii) through (iv), the trans-axle is automatically shifted to “N”.

25p002i

Shift lever

The shift lever always re-turns to this original positionafter shifting operation.

“P” position switch

You can operate the shiftlever only in “D”.

Keep the shift lever in “N”for a while after you shift itto that position.

145

25p121

(a) Shift lever

The shift position is displayed on the in-strument cluster.

R: Reverse position (buzzer sounds)

N: Neutral position

D: Normal driving position

B: Engine braking position (shown only while in “D”)

NOTICE

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, the lever may cause a mal-function, resulting in trouble:

� Do not remove the knob on the le-ver.

� Do not use a knob other than theoriginally fitted knob.

� Do not hang anything on the lever.

Should you find anything unusual,contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

(b) “P” position switch

The “P” (parking) position is displayed onthe instrument cluster, and the indicatoron the “P” position switch comes on.

(c) Normal driving

1. Start the hybrid system as instructed in“How to start the hybrid system” onpage 350.

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the shift lever to “D”.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting. Doing so cancause abrupt acceleration.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

When you shift the transaxle to “D”while backing up, an alarm sounds andthe transaxle is shifted to “N”.

146

25p004c

(d) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, shift the shift leverto “B” position.

During high speed driving, you may feelthat deceleration by engine braking is lessthan that of a typical vehicle.

Do not continue normal driving with thetransaxle in “B” for a long time. This maycause decreased fuel economy. To preventthis, use “D” for normal driving.

When you shift the transaxle to “B” froma position other than “D”, an alarm soundsand the transaxle is automatically shiftedto “N”.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to skid orspin.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the shift lever to the“R” position. You will hear beeps whilethe transaxle is in “R”.

When you shift the transaxle to “R” whiledriving, an alarm sounds and the transaxleis shifted to “N”.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,fully depress the parking brake pedalto apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,push the “P” position switch.

If you press the “POWER” switch whilestopping, the transaxle is automaticallyshifted to the “P” and the hybrid systemis turned off.

If the driver’s door is opened when thetransaxle is in “N”, “D” or “B”, beepsounds and a warning message appearson the multi−information display to warnyou to shift the transaxle to “P”.

If you push the “P” position switch whiledriving, an alarm sounds and the transaxleis automatically shifted to “N”.

NOTICE

Be sure to put the hybrid transaxle in“P” when parking. In “N”, the hybridbattery will not be charged even if thegasoline engine is running. You can-not start your vehicle if the transaxleis left in “N” for a long time becausethe hybrid battery will discharge.

When shifting the transaxle from “P” onthe slope, a large parking lock releasingnoise will be generated. However, thisdoes not indicate a malfunction.

147

(g) Vehicle driving characteristics

Creeping

In order to hold the vehicle properly on anincline and for better accelerator pedaloperation at starting, your vehicle is de-signed like a typical automatic transmis-sion vehicle which tends to move withoutdepressing the accelerator pedal with thetransaxle in a position other than “P” or“N”.

With the transaxle in a position other than“P” or “N”, depress the brake pedal firmlyeven when stopped and apply the parkingbrake as required.

When moving in a compact area or duringa traffic jam, it is an effective way tocontrol the speed using only the brakepedal operation without depressing the ac-celerator pedal.

Regenerative brake

When the accelerator pedal is released orthe brake pedal is depressed, the electricmotor acts as a generator and convertskinetic energy to electric energy to providedeceleration and recover electric energy tocharge the hybrid battery.

At this time, the electric motor runningnoise may increase.

The operation is the same as a typicalgasoline powered vehicle.

You may experience the following condi-tion while braking. As they do not indicatea malfunction, perform braking as usual:

� In the “OFF” mode, pressing the“POWER” switch once or twice will se-lect “ACC” or “IG−ON” only if the brakepedal is not depressed. In this condi-tion, the brake pedal may move a little.

Hybrid driving

This vehicle runs in combination with thegasoline engine and electric motor.

If the “READY” light is on, you can startyour vehicle even with the gasoline enginestopped.

(h) If the system malfunctions

In the following conditions, there is someproblem in the system.

� The indicator on the “P” position switchflashes. However, this does not indi-cate a malfunction unless a warningmessage appears in the multi−informa-tion display.

� All frames of shift position indicators inthe instrument cluster flash.

� The parking system error message ap-pears on the multi−information display.

� The instrument cluster and multi−infor-mation display does not come on whenthe “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

In these cases, stop your vehicle in asafe and level place, apply the parkingbrake securely and contact your Toyotadealer immediately.

(i) When the 12 volt battery is discon-nected

Before you disconnect the 12 volt battery,confirm the shift position is “P” and applythe parking brake completely.

After you reconnect the 12 volt battery,shift the shift lever to “N” and confirm theshift position is in “N” when the “IG−ON”mode is enabled.

148

The vehicle stability control systemhelps provide integrated control of thesystems such as anti−lock brake sys-tem, brake assist system, hybrid systemcontrol, etc. This system automaticallycontrols the brakes and hybrid systemto help prevent the vehicle from skid-ding when cornering on a slippery roadsurface or operating steering wheelabruptly.

The vehicle stability control system is acti-vated when the vehicle speed is morethan about 15 km/h (9 mph).

CAUTION

� Do not rely exclusively on the ve-hicle stability control system. Evenif the vehicle stability control sys-tem is operating, you must alwaysdrive carefully and attentively toavoid death or serious injury. Reck-less driving will result in an unex-pected accident. If the slip indicatorlight flashes, sounding an alarm,special care should be taken whiledriving.

� Only use tires of specified size. Thesize, manufacturer, brand and treadpattern for all 4 tires should be thesame. If you use tires other thanspecified, or mixed types or size,the vehicle stability control systemmay not function correctly. Whenreplacing the tires or wheels, con-tact your Toyota dealer. (See“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 411.)

25p115a

Slip indicator light

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-ing, the slip indicator light blinks and analarm sounds intermittently. Special careshould be taken while driving.

The slip indicator light blinks in the follow-ing conditions also.

� The vehicle tires are racing. Utmostcare is required when driving.

� When the anti−lock brake system isoperating. See “Brake system” on page327 for details.

Vehicle stability controlsystem

149

The slip indicator light comes on when the“IG−ON” mode is enabled and will go offafter the “READY” light comes on. If theindicator light does not come on when thehybrid system is turned on, contact yourToyota dealer.

25p117

“VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle stability controlsystem.

The light will come on when the “IG−ON”mode is enabled and will go off after the“READY” light comes on.

If the light comes on while driving, thesystem does not work. However, becausethe conventional braking still operates, youcan drive your vehicle without damagingit. Contact your Toyota dealer.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer:

� The warning light does not come onafter the “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

� The warning light remains on after the“READY” light comes on.

� The warning light comes on while driv-ing.

150

The tire pressure warning system warnsyou that the tire inflation pressure islow.

The tire pressure warning system is nota substitute for checking normal tire infla-tion pressure. Check the tire inflationpressure with a tire pressure gauge regu-larly.

CAUTION

The warning system may not activateimmediately if bursts or sudden airleakage should occur.

The tire pressure warning light comes onwhen the “POWER” switch is selected in“IG−ON” mode and goes off after a fewseconds. This means the tire pressurewarning light is operating properly. If thetire inflation pressure becomes low, thelight comes on again. In this case, adjust-ing the tire inflation pressure will turn offthe light after a few minutes. If the lightcomes on after blinking for 1 minute, thetire pressure warning system is not work-ing properly.

Indicatorstatus

Meanings Do this

ON Tire inflationpressure islow

Adjust thetire inflationpressure

ON afterblinking for1 minute

Tire pres-sure warn-ing systemmalfunction

Have thesystemchecked atyour Toyotadealer

CAUTION

If the tire pressure warning lightcomes on, be sure to observe thefollowing precautions. Failure to doso could cause loss of vehicle controland result in death or serious injury.

� Stop your vehicle in a safe place assoon as possible. Adjust the tireinflation pressure immediately.

� If the tire pressure warning lightcomes on even after tire inflationpressure adjustment, it is probablethat you have a flat tire. Check thetires. If the tire is flat, change tothe spare tire and have the flat tirerepaired by the nearest Toyota deal-er.

Tire pressure warning system

151

� Avoid abrupt maneuvering and bra-king. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,you could lose control of the steer-ing wheel or the brakes.

The tire pressure warning light may turnon due to natural causes such as naturalair leaks or tire inflation pressure changescaused by temperature. In this case, ad-justing the tire inflation pressure will turnoff the light after a few minutes.

Pushing the tire pressure warning resetswitch should not turn off the tire pressurewarning light. Adjusting the tire inflationpressure will turn off the light.

The compact spare tire is not equippedwith the tire pressure warning valve andtransmitter. If a tire goes flat, the warninglight will not turn off even though the flattire is replaced with the spare tire. Re-place the spare tire with the repaired tireand adjust the proper tire inflation pressur-e. The tire pressure warning light will turnoff after a few minutes.

CAUTION

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label (tireand load information label). (If yourvehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label(tire and load information label), youshould determine the proper tire infla-tion pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your ve-hicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS–tire pressure warning system) that il-luminates a low tire pressure telltale(tire pressure warning light) when oneor more of your tires is significantlyunder−inflated. Accordingly, when thelow tire pressure telltale (tire pres-sure warning light) illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on a sig-nificantly under−inflated tire causesthe tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under−inflation also re-duces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s han-dling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pres-sure warning system) is not a substi-tute for proper tire maintenance, andit is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder−inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale (tirepressure warning light).

152

NOTICE

� Do not use liquid sealants for a flattire as tire pressure warning valveand transmitter will be damaged.

� When the tires must be repaired orreplaced, have them repaired or re-placed by the nearest Toyota dealeror an authorized tire dealer. Thetire pressure warning valves andtransmitters will be affected by theinstallation or removal of tires.

IF THE TIRE PRESSURE WARNINGLIGHT COMES ON AFTER BLINKINGFOR 1 MINUTE...

If the tire pressure warning light comeson after blinking for 1 minute when the“POWER” switch is selected in “IG−ON”mode, the tire pressure warning systemis not working properly.

The system will be disabled in the follow-ing conditions:(When the condition becomes normal, thesystem will work properly.)

� If tires not equipped with tire pressurewarning valves and transmitters areused.

� If the ID code on the tire pressure warn-ing valves and transmitters is not regis-tered on the tire pressure warning ECU.

� If electronic devices or facilities usingsimilar radio wave frequencies arenearby.

� If a radio set at similar frequencies isin use in the vehicle.

� If a window tint that affects the radiowave signals is installed.

� If there is a lot of snow or ice on thevehicle, in particular around the wheelsor wheel housings.

� If non−genuine Toyota wheels are used.

� If tire chains are used.

� If the tire inflation pressure is morethan 500 kPa (5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar, 73psi) or higher.

If the tire pressure warning light continuesto come on after blinking for 1 minutewhen the “POWER” switch is selected in“IG−ON” mode, have the system checkedby your Toyota dealer.

Even if you use genuine wheels, the tirepressure warning system may not workproperly with some types of tires.

153

Pushing the tire pressure warning resetswitch should not turn off the tire pressurewarning light. For vehicles sold in U.S.A.



NOTICE:This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruc-tions, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. However, there isno guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on, the user is en-couraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:

� Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

� Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

154

� Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

� Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.


Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

REPLACING TIRES AND WHEELS

When replacing the tires and wheels, besure to install tire pressure warning valvesand transmitters. ID codes on the tirepressure warning valves and transmittersare registered on the tire pressure warningECU. When replacing a tire pressurewarning valve and transmitter, it is neces-sary to register the ID code of tire pres-sure warning valve and transmitter. Havethe ID code registered by your Toyotadealer.

If the ID code is not registered, the sys-tem will not work properly. After about 1hour, the tire pressure warning lightcomes on after blinking for 1 minute toindicate a system malfunction.

NOTICE

When the tires or tire pressure warn-ing valves and transmitters must bereplaced, have them replaced by yourToyota dealer. The tire pressure warn-ing valves and transmitters will beaffected by the installation or removalof tires.

Tire pressure warning reset switch

25p122

When initializing the system, the presenttire inflation pressure is stored as stan-dard. The tire pressure warning systemdetermines decreased air pressure bycomparing the present and the standardtire inflation pressures. When you changethe set tire inflation pressure, it is neces-sary to initialize the tire pressure warningsystem.

� When rotating the tires on vehicles dif-fering with front and rear tire inflationpressures.

� When changing the tire size.

155

To initialize the system, perform the fol-lowing:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place andthe hybrid system is off.

2. Adjust the pressure of all the installedtires to the specified cold tire inflationpressure level. (See “Tires” on page434.)

3. Turn the “POWER” switch to “IG−ON”mode.

4. Push and hold the tire pressure warn-ing reset switch until the tire pressurewarning light blinks slowly three times.

5. Wait for a few minutes with the “POW-ER” switch selected in “IG−ON” mode,and then turn the hybrid system off.

If you push the tire pressure reset switchwhile the vehicle is moving, initialization isnot performed.

If you push the tire pressure reset switchaccidentally and initialization is performed,adjust the tire inflation pressure to thespecified level and initialize the systemagain.

25p124

If the tire pressure warning light does notblink slowly three times when you pushand hold the reset switch, initialization hasfailed and the tire pressure warning sys-tem may not work properly. In this case,initialize the system again. If initializationcannot be performed, have the systemchecked at your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not push the reset switch withoutfirst adjusting the tire inflation pres-sure to the specified level. Otherwise,the tire pressure warning light maynot come on even if the tire inflationpressure is low, or it may come onwhen the tire inflation pressure is ac-tually normal.

156

25p008a

Vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

25p009a

Vehicles sold in Canada

When parking, firmly apply the parkingbrake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brakepedal. For better holding power, first de-press the brake pedal and hold it whilesetting the parking brake.

To release: Depress the parking brakepedal while depressing the brake pedal.

To remind you that the parking brake isset, the parking brake reminder light inthe instrument panel remains on until yourelease the parking brake.

CAUTION

� Driving with the parking brake en-gaged can reduce braking power.

� Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the park-ing brake reminder light is off.

Cruise controlThe cruise control allows you to cruisethe vehicle at a desired speed over 40km/h (25 mph) even with your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintained upor down grades within the limits of hybridsystem performance, although a slightspeed change may occur when driving upor down the grades. On steeper hills, agreater speed change will occur so it isbetter to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

� To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use thecruise control when driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow–covered) orwinding roads.

� Avoid vehicle speed increases whendriving downhill. If the vehiclespeed is too fast in relation to thecruise control set speed, cancel thecruise control then shift the shiftlever to “B” position to use enginebraking to slow down.

Parking brake

157

25p006a

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON

To operate the cruise control, push the“ON·OFF” switch. This turns the systemon. The indicator light in the instrumentpanel shows that you can now set thevehicle at a desired cruising speed. Anoth-er push on the switch will turn the systemcompletely off.

CAUTION

To avoid accidental cruise control en-gagement, keep the “ON·OFF” switchoff when not using the cruise control.

25p007a

SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED

The transaxle must be in “D” before youset the cruise control speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “– SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed.

If the speed is not satisfactory, tap thelever up for a faster speed, or tap it downfor a slower speed. Each tap changes theset speed by 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph). You cannow take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

If you need acceleration—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe set speed. When you release it, thevehicle will return to the speed set priorto the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

You can cancel the preset speed by:

a. Pulling the control lever in the“CANCEL” direction and releasing it.

b. Depressing the brake pedal.

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will auto-matically cancel out.

If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the preset speed, the presetspeed will also automatically cancel out.

If the preset speed automatically cancelsout other than for the above cases, haveyour vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-er at the earliest opportunity.

158

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. Release the lever when thedesired speed is attained. While the leveris held up, the vehicle will gradually gainspeed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-celerate the vehicle and then push thecontrol lever down in the “– SET” direc-tion.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “– SET” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held down, the vehicle speed willgradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thecontrol lever down in the “– SET” direc-tion.

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

If the preset speed is cancelled by pullingthe control lever or by depressing thebrake pedal, pushing the lever up in the“+ RES” direction will restore the speedset prior to cancellation.

However, once the vehicle speed falls be-low about 40 km/h (25 mph), the presetspeed will not be resumed.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light in theinstrument cluster flashes when using thecruise control, press the “ON·OFF” buttonto turn the system off and then press itagain to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-curs, there is some trouble in the cruisecontrol system.

� The indicator light does not come on.

� The indicator light flashes again.

� The indicator light goes out after itcomes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyotadealer and have your vehicle inspected.

159

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSMulti−information displayReference 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before using the multi−information display 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch operation 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hands−free system 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustment 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside temperature display 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 7

160

1. Multi−information display*(See page 163 for details.)

2. “DISPLAY” buttonThe display adjustment screen isshown.(See page 238 for details.)

3. “INFO” buttonThe information menu screen is shown.(See page 166 for details.)

4. “CLIMATE” buttonThe air conditioning operation screen isshown.(See page 288 for details.)

5. “AUDIO” buttonThe audio operation screen is shown.(See page 242 for details.)

6. “INFO” button (on the steering pad)The trip information screen is shown.(See page 168 for details.)

7. Speech command button (on the steer-ing pad)(See page 236 for details.)

8. Telephone button (on the steering pad)(See page 171 for details.)

*: In this manual, English version screensare shown as an example.

Reference

�Type 1

27p163b

161






6. “INFO” button (on the steering pad)The trip information screen is shown.(See page 168 for details.)

7. Speech command button (on the steer-ing pad)(See page 185 for details.)

8. Telephone button (on the steering pad)(See page 171 for details.)


�Type 2

27p162b

162







�Type 3

163

27p178

Type 1 and Type 2

26p049b

Type 3

When the “ACC” mode is enabled, theinitial screen appears and the system be-gins operating.

After a few seconds, the previous modedisplay will appear.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the multi−informationdisplay, the display will be automaticallyset to the initial mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Switch operationThis system operates mainly by theswitches on the screen. To protect thescreen, lightly touch switches on thescreen with your finger. When you toucha switch on the screen or on the bezel,a beep sounds.

� If the system does not respond to atouch of a switch, move your fingeraway from the screen and then touchit again.

� You cannot operate dimmed switches.

� Wipe off fingerprints on the surface ofthe display using a glass cleaningcloth.

� The displayed image may becomedarker and moving images may beslightly distorted when the display iscold.

� When you look at the screen throughpolarized material such as polarizedsunglasses, the screen may be darkand hard to see. If so, look at thescreen from different angles, adjust thescreen settings on the “Display”screen, or take off your sunglasses.

Before usingthe multi−information display

164

Functions

26p148

Type 1*

27p149

Type 2

26p027c

Type 3

1. Trip information, Telephone, Lan-guage and Screen setting

For details, see page 166.

*: For other functions (Maintenance, Cal-ender and Beep setting), see the sepa-rate “Navigation System Owner’s Manu-al”.

27p142a

2. Adjustment

The contrast and brightness on the screenare adjusted. For details, see page 238.

165

27p150

3. Air conditioner

Climate setting operations are available.For details, see page 288.

26p203a

4. Audio

The radio and compact disc operationsare available. For details, see page 242.

24p117

5. Warning display

The warning symbol for the faulty systemappears. For details, see page 133.

166

Information

26p009b

Type 1 Type 2 and Type3

Push the “INFO” button to display the“Information Menu” screen.

27p148

Type 1

27p149

Type 2

26p027c

Type 3

Trip information: The energy monitor andfuel consumption screen are selected.

Telephone: Telephone screen is shown.(See “Hands−free system” on page 171 fordetails.)

Language: Select language screen isshown.

Screen setting: The screen setting screenis shown.

167

—Trip information

27p151b

Type 1 and Type 2

26p038d

Type 3

Energy monitor screen

Touch the “Energy” switch. Vehicle drivingcondition, hybrid system operating condi-tion and energy recovery condition areshown.

1. Indicates the flow of energy by orangeand yellow arrows. While the energy isrecovered, the arrows change thepointing direction and turn green.

2. Indicates the remaining capacity of thehybrid battery.

The screen display updates every 3 sec-onds, so it may not coincide with theactual status.

27p152b

Type 1 and Type 2

26p039d

Type 3

168

Fuel consumption screen

Touch the “Consumption” switch. Averagefuel consumption, momentary fuel con-sumption and recovered energy areshown.

1. Indicates the past momentary fuel con-sumption every 5 minutes.

2. Indicates the energy recovered for 5minutes with symbols. One symbol re-fers to 50 Wh or the energy by whicha 50 W bulb illuminates for an hour.Up to 4 symbols will be shown.

3. Indicates the current momentary fuelconsumption.

4. Indicates the average fuel consumptionafter being reset. When the “Reset”switch is touched or more than 10 L(2.6 gal., 2.2 Imp.gal.) fuel is supplied,the average fuel consumption is reset.

26P180

Steering switch operation (Type 1 and Type 2)

The trip information screen appears direct-ly by pressing the “INFO” button on theright side of the steering pad. Each presschanges the “Energy Monitor” and “Con-sumption” screens alternately.

27p154

Type 1 and Type 2

26p115

Type 3

—Language

169

You can select the language shown onthe screen. Touch your desired switchon the screen.

—Screen setting

27p145

Type 1 and Type 2

AUTOMATIC TRANSITION

The function returning to the previousscreen from the audio or air conditionerscreen is selectable. Select “ON” or“OFF” and then touch “OK”.

ON: The previous screen automatically re-turns from the audio or air condition-er screen 20 seconds after the endof audio or air conditioner screen op-eration.

OFF:The audio or air conditioner screenremains on.

SWITCH COLOR

Select the desired switch color andtouch “OK”.

DELETE PERSONAL DATA

The following personal data can be de-leted or returned to their default set-tings:

� Phone book data

� Dialed numbers and received calls

� Speed dial

� Bluetooth� phone data

� Security code

This function is available only when thevehicle is not moving.

170

27p145

1. Touch “Delete personal data”.

The “Delete personal data” screen ap-pears.

27p342

2. Touch “Delete”.

The “Confirmation for deleting all personaldata” screen appears.

27p343

3. Touch “Yes”.

171

26p030c

Type 3

AUTOMATIC TRANSITION

The function returning to the previousscreen from the audio or air conditionerscreen is selectable. Select “ON” or“OFF” and then touch “OK”.

ON: The previous screen automatically re-turns from the audio or air condition-er screen 20 seconds after the endof audio or air conditioner screen op-eration.

OFF:The audio or air conditioner screenremains on.

BACKGROUND COLOR

Select the desired background colorand touch “OK”.

Hands−free system allows you to makeor receive a call without taking yourhands off the steering wheel by con-necting your cellular phone.

This system supports Bluetooth�.Bluetooth� is a wireless data system bywhich you can call without your cellularphone being connected with a cable orplaced on a cradle.

If your cellular phone does not supportBluetooth�, this system cannot function.

CAUTION

While you are driving, do not use acellular phone or connect theBluetooth� phone.

NOTICE

Do not leave your cellular phone inthe vehicle. The temperature indoormay be high and damage the phone.

Hands−free system—

172

INFORMATION

In the following conditions, the sys-tem may not function.

� The cellular phone is turned off.

� The current position is outside thecommunication area.

� The cellular phone is not connected.

� The cellular phone has a low bat-tery.

27p333

By pushing the telephone button above,you can receive a call or hang up with-out taking your hands off the steeringwheel.

27p334

You can use the microphone abovewhen talking on the phone.

173

The other party’s voice outputs from thedriver’s speaker. When the received callsor received voice outputs, the audio fromthe audio system will be muted.

INFORMATION

� Talk alternately with the other partyon the phone. If you talk at thesame time, the voice may not reacheach other. (It is not a malfunc-tion.)

� Keep the volume of receiving voicedown. Otherwise, echo is comingup. When you talk on the phone,speak clearly towards the micro-phone.

� In the following situations, yourvoice may not reach the other party.

� Driving on unpaved road. (Mak-ing a traffic noise.)

� Driving at the high speed.

� The window is open.

� Turning the air conditioning ventstowards the microphone.

� The sound of the air conditioningfan is loud.

27p180

1. Indicates the condition of Bluetooth�connection.

“Blue” indicates an excellent connectionto Bluetooth�.

“Yellow” indicates a bad connection toBluetooth�, resulting in possible deteriora-tion of voice quality.

: no connection to Bluetooth�.

2. Indicates the amount of batterycharge left.

Empty Full

It is not displayed while the Bluetooth� isconnecting or the phone book data is be-ing transferred.

The amount left does not always corre-spond with the one of your cellular phone.This system does not have a chargingfunction.

3. Indicates the receiving area.

“Rm” is displayed when receiving inRoaming area.

“Hm” is displayed when receiving inHome area.

4. Indicates the level of reception.

Too bad Excellent

The level of reception does not alwayscorrespond with the one of your cellularphone.

174

INFORMATION

This system supports the followingservice.

� HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0

� OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1

If your cellular phone does not sup-port HFP, you cannot enter theBluetooth� phone, and take OPP ser-vice individually.

An antenna for the Bluetooth� connec-tion is built in the display. The indica-tion of the Bluetooth� connection mayturn yellow and the system may notfunction when you use the Bluetooth�phone in the following conditions andplaces.

� Your cellular phone is hiding behind thedisplay (behind the seat or in the glovebox and console box).

� Your cellular phone touches or is cov-ered with metal materials.

Leave the Bluetooth� phone on the placewhere “Blue” indication is displayed.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG. Inc.

When you release your vehicle:

A lot of personal data is registeredwhen you use the hands−free system.When you release your vehicle, initial-ize your data.

If you initialize it, the former state willnever come back again. Pay much atten-tion when initializing the data.

You can initialize the following data in thesystem.

� phone book data

� dialed numbers and received calls

� speed dial

� Bluetooth� phone data

� security code

175

FCC ID: BABBT003AIC ID: 2024B−BT003AMADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS−210 of the ICRules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) This device must accept any inter-ference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION


CAUTION: Radio Frequency RadiationExposure

This equipment complies with FCCradiation exposure limits set forth foruncontrolled equipment and meets theFCC radio frequency (RF) ExposureGuidelines in Supplement C to OET65.This equipment has very low levels ofRF energy that it deemed to complywithout maximum permissive expo-sure evaluation (MPE). But it is desir-able that it should be installed andoperated with at least 20cm and morebetween radiator and person’s body(excluding extremities; hands, wrists,feet and legs).

Co−location: This transmitter must notbe co−located or operated in conjunc-tion with any other antenna or trans-mitter.

To use the hands−free system, youneed to enter your phone into the sys-tem. Once you have registered it, youcan make a hands−free call.

1. Push the “INFO” button to displaythe “Information” screen.

—Entering a Bluetooth� phone

176

27p181

2. Touch the “Telephone” switch to dis-play “Telephone” screen.

You can also push the button of thesteering wheel to display this screen whenthe vehicle is stopped.

27p182

3. Touch the “Settings” switch to dis-play “Settings” screen.

27p183

4. Touch the “Bluetooth*” switch todisplay the “Bluetooth* Settings”screen.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG. Inc.

177

27p184

5. Touch the “Register” switch to con-nect your cellular phone to the sys-tem.

27p185

6. When this screen is displayed, inputthe Passkey displayed on the screeninto the phone.

For the operation of the phone, see themanual that comes with your cellularphone.

If you want to cancel it, touch “Cancel”.

27p186

7. When the connection is completed,this screen is displayed.

You do not need to enter the phone incase of using the same one.

178

27p187

When this screen is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.

27p188

� Connecting a Bluetooth� phone

(a) automatically

When you register your phone, autoconnection will be turned on. Alwaysset it to this mode and leave theBluetooth� phone in a condition whereconnection can be established.

Each time you touch the “Auto Connect”switch, auto connection will be switchedon or off.

27p189

When the “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode isenabled, the selected Bluetooth� phonewill be automatically connected and theconnection result is displayed.

This screen appears when the Bluetooth�phone is first connected after the “ACC”or “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

179

27p190

(b) manually

When the auto connection failed orturned off, you have to connectBluetooth� manually.

Touch the “Connect” switch after hav-ing enabled the Bluetooth� connectionon the phone.

27p191

When the connection is completed, thisscreen is displayed.

Now you can use the Bluetooth� phone.

� Reconnecting the Bluetooth� phone

If the Bluetooth� phone is disconnectedwith a poor reception from theBluetooth� network when the “ACC” or“IG−ON” mode is enabled, the systemautomatically reconnects the Bluetooth�phone. In this case, the connectionresult is not displayed.

If the Bluetooth� is disconnected on pur-pose such as you turned your cellularphone off, this does not happen. Recon-nect it by the following methods.

� Select the Bluetooth� phone again.

� Enter the Bluetooth� phone.

180

After you enter the Bluetooth� phone,you can call by using hands−free sys-tem. You can call using the 7 methodsdescribed below.

27p192

(a) By dial

You can call by inputting the telephonenumber.

This cannot be operated while you aredriving.

Touch the desired key to input the tele-phone number.

Each time you touch “�”, an inputteddigit is deleted.

When you touch “ ”, the number youcalled last is inputted.

Touch “ ” or push the button of thesteering wheel.

—Calling on the Bluetooth�phone

181

27p193

(b) By phone book

You can call by phone book data whichis transferred from your cellular phone.

The system has one phone book. Youcan register up to 1000 numbers.


Touch the desired key to input the tele-phone number.

1. Touch the “Phone Book” switch todisplay “Phone Book” screen.

27p194

2. Select the desired number from thelist.

27p195


182

27p196

(c) By dialed numbers

You can call by dialed number. Thesystem memorizes up to 5 dialed num-bers. If it is over 5, the oldest numberis deleted.


1. Touch the “Call Log” switch to dis-play “Outgoing Calls” screen.

27p197

� When you call by phone book, thename (if registered) is displayed.

� When you call the same number con-tinuously, only the newest number isregistered.


27p198


183

27p196

(d) By received calls

You can call by received calls. Whena call is received, the system memo-rizes up to 5 numbers. If it is over 5,the oldest number is deleted.


1. Touch the “Call Log” switch to dis-play.

27p199

2. Touch the “Incoming Calls” switch todisplay “Incoming Calls” screen.

27p200

� When a telephone number registered inthe phone book is received, the nameand the number are displayed.

� Received calls which you did not an-swer are also memorized in the systemand “Abs.” is displayed on the leftside of the number.

� Unnoticed telephone number such as apublic telephone is not memorized inthe system.


184

27p198


� An international phone call may not bemade depending on the cellular phonewhich you have.

27p201

(e) By speed dial

You can call by registered telephonenumber which you selected from aphone book, dialed numbers and re-ceived calls. (See page 191 for regis-tering the speed dial.)

1. Touch the “Speed Dial” switch todisplay “Speed Dial” screen.

27p202

2. Touch the desired number to call.You can change the page by touch-ing “Speed Dial 2” or “Speed Dial3”.

When you push the telephone button whileyou are driving, the screen above ap-pears. Touch the desired name to call.(The telephone number is not displayed.)

185

27p203

(f) By voice recognition

You can call by giving a command. (Forthe operation and command of voicerecognition, see “Speech CommandSystem” on page 236 and “Help screen”on page 237.)

27p194

Example: Call Charlize

� Dialing by name

You can call by giving a voice tag reg-istered in the phone book. For settingthe voice recognition, see “Setting thevoice recognition” on page 210.

You: Push the talk switch.

System: “After the beep, please say thename.”

You: “Charlize.”

System: “Charlize chosen, when ready,please briefly push the talkswitch or push the off−hookswitch to dial.”


System: “After the beep, please say“Dial”.”

You: “Dial.”

System: “Dialing the name.”

Now you can call Charlize.

186

27p204

“Next” is displayed when multiple entriesare found for a searched name.

Up to 6 entries can be displayed includingthe first searched one.

Do the following to change the entry tothe next one.

� Touch the “Next” switch.

� Push the talk switch to say “Next Can-didate”.

Calling without the voice recognition.

After the entry number is displayed, youcan also call by pushing the telephonebutton or touching the “Dial” switch.

Cancelling the voice recognition

The voice recognition will be cancelledwhen you do the following.

� Keep on pushing the talk switch.

� Push the button of the steeringwheel.

� Touch the “Cancel” switch. (Except forrecognizing the command)

� Say “Cancel”.

27p205

� Dialing by phone number

You can call by giving a desired num-ber.

187


System: “After the beep, please say thenumber.”

You: “812387”

System: “When ready, please brieflypush the talk switch or pushthe off−hook switch to dial.”


System: “After the beep, please continueto add numbers or say “Dial”.”

You: “Dial.”

System: “Dialing the number.”

Now you can call 812387.

27p206

� Sending a tone

You can send a tone by giving a de-sired number.


System: “Say numbers, pound, or star.”

You: “1234.”

System: “1234.” “Push the talk switch.”


System: “Send? Say Yes or No.”

You: “Yes.”

System: “Sending.”

Now you can send the tone.

27p207

(g) By POI call (with Navigation Sys-tem)

You can call by touching “ ” when itis displayed on the screen from Naviga-tion system. (See the separate “Navi-gation System Owner’s Manual” for de-tails.)

188

27p208

When a call is received, this screen isdisplayed with a sound. Touch “ ”

or push the button of the steeringwheel to talk on the phone.

To hang up the phone:

Touch “ ” or push the button ofthe steering wheel again.

To refuse to receive the call:

Touch “ ” and hold it.

To adjust the volume of received call:Touch “–” or “+” or use the volumeswitch of the steering wheel.

On the international phone call, the otherparty’s name may not be displayed cor-rectly depending on the cellular phonewhich you have. 27p209

While you are talking on the phone,this screen is displayed. You can dothe operations below on the screen.

To adjust the volume of the other party’svoice:

Touch “–” or “+” or use the volumeswitch of the steering wheel.


Touch the “ ” switch or push the

button of the steering wheel

To mute your voice:Touch the “Mute” switch.

—Receiving on theBluetooth� phone

—Talking on the Bluetooth�phone

189

To input a Key:Touch the “0−9” switch.

To transfer the callTouch the “Transfer Call” switch.

You cannot change from hands−free callto cellular phone call while you are driv-ing.

When you change from cellular phone callto hands−free call, the hands−free screenwill be displayed and you can operate iton the screen.

Transferring method and behavior are dif-ferent depending on the cellular phonewhich you have.

For the operation of the phone, see themanual that comes with your cellularphone.

27p206

Touch the desired number to input thekey.


Touch “ ” or push the button ofthe steering wheel.


27p210

If the continuous tone signal is regis-tered in a phone book, this screen ap-pears. (If not registered, “Send” and“Exit” are not displayed.)

Confirm the number displayed on thescreen and touch “Send”. The numberbefore marked sign will be sent.

When you touch “Exit”, this function willbe finished and normal tone screen ap-pears.


Touch “ ” or push the button ofthe steering wheel.

The continuous tone signal is the markedsign (p or w) and the number followingtelephone number. (ex. 056133p0123w#1�)

190

You can do this operation when you wantto operate an answering machine or use atelephone service in bank for example.You can register the phone number andthe code number in the phone book.

27p211

� Sending a tone by the speed tone

You can send a tone by the speed tone.(For registering the speed tone, see“Registering the speed tone” on page195.)

1. Touch the “Speed Tone” switch.

27p212

2. Touch the desired switch to send atone.

191

27p311

Touch the “Settings” switch to display“Settings” screen.

27p214

You can change the settings of thephone.

27p215

(a) Registering the speed dial

You can register the desired telephonenumber from phone book, dialed num-bers and received calls. Up to 17speed dial numbers can be registered.

The 6th entry is the speed dial for redial-ing.

1. Touch the “Speed Dial” switch todisplay the “Speed Dial Settings”screen.

—Changing the settings ofthe Bluetooth� phone

192

27p216

2. Touch the “Register” switch of“Speed Dial”.

27p217

3. Select the data you want to register.

27p218

4. Touch the desired telephone number.

193

27p219

5. Touch the switch you want to regis-ter in.

The latest dialed number is registered inthe 6th item (speed redial).

27p220

6. If you select a switch you registeredbefore, this screen is displayed.

Touch the “Yes” switch if you want tooverwrite it.

27p221

� Deleting the speed dial individually

You can delete “01” − “17” of thespeed dial individually.

If you delete them all at once, all of 17numbers are deleted.

1. Touch the “Delete” switch of “SpeedDial”.

194

27p222

2. Touch the switch you want to delete.

27p223

3. Touch the “Yes” switch.

27p224

� Deleting all of the speed dial

1. Touch the “Delete All” switch of“Speed Dial”.

195

27p225


27p226

(b) Registering the speed tone

You can register the desired tone num-ber. Up to 6 speed tone numbers canbe registered.

1. Touch the “Register” switch of“Speed Tone”.

27p227

2. Use the software keyboard to inputthe name.

196

27p228

3. Input the number and touch “OK”.

27p229

4. Touch the desired switch you wantto register in.

27p230

5. If you select a switch you registeredbefore, this screen is displayed.Touch the “Yes” switch if you wantto overwrite it.

197

27p231

� Editing the speed tone.

You can edit the speed tone.

1. Touch the “Edit” switch of “SpeedTone”.

27p232

2. Touch the switch you want to edit.

27p233


198

27p234

4. Input the number and touch “OK”.

27p235

� Deleting the speed tone individually.

You can delete “1” to “6” of the speedtone.

If you delete them all at once, all of 6numbers are deleted.

1. Touch the “Delete” switch of “SpeedTone”.

27p232

2. Touch the switch you want to delete.

199

27p236


27p237

� Deleting all the speed tone

1. Touch the “Delete All” switch of“Speed Tone”.

27p238


200

27p239

(c) Setting the volume

1. Touch the “Volume” switch to dis-play the “Volume Setting” screen.

27p240

2. Touch the “−” or “+” switch to ad-just the “Voice Volume” or “RingVolume”.

Voice Volume adjusting the other. . party’s voice.

Ring Volume adjusting the ring volume.. . .

� Automatic volume settings for highspeed

You can set the volume one step upwhen the vehicle speed is over 80 km/h(50 mph). (When it is under 70 km/h (44mph), previous volume is back.)

Each time you touch the “Adaptive VolumeControl” switch, you can switch on or off.

201

27p241

� Initializing the settings

You can initialize the settings.

Touch the “Default” switch.

27p242

Touch the “Yes” switch.

27p243

(d) Setting the screen

1. Touch the “Screen” switch to displaythe “Screen Settings” screen.

202

27p244

2. Do the detailed settings of thescreen and touch “OK”.

27p245

� Receiving Call Display

You can select the method of the re-ceiving call display.

Touch the “Full” or “Icon” switch.

Full mode When a call is received,. . . . . . the hands−free screen isdisplayed and you canoperate it on the screen.

Icon mode The message is. . . . . displayed on the upperside of the screen. Youcan only operate thesteering switch.

27p246

� Auto answer

When a call is received, the displayautomatically changes to the talkingscreen and you can start to talk on thephone (without touching any switch) af-ter the preset time.

Touch the “ON” switch of “Auto An-swer” and “−” or “+” switch to adjustthe waiting time of auto answer within1 − 60 seconds.

203

27p189

� The Bluetooth� connection status atstartup

When you turn the “POWER” switch to“ACC” or “IG−ON” and the Bluetooth�is automatically connected, the connec-tion check is displayed.

27p247

Touch the “ON” or “OFF” switch ofShow Bluetooth� connection status atstartup.

27p248

� Initializing the settings


Touch the “Default” switch.

204

27p249


27p250

(e) Setting the phone book

You can register phone numbers in thephone book.

Touch the “Phone Book” to display the“Phone Book Management” screen.

27p251

You can do the detailed settings ofphone book.

205

27p252

� Transferring a telephone number

You can transfer the telephone numbersin your Bluetooth� phone to the sys-tem. Up to 1000 person’s data (up to2 numbers a person) can be registeredin the phone book.

Transfer it while the engine is running.

1. Touch the “Transfer Data” switch todisplay “Select Group” screen.

27p253

2. Select the group you want to trans-fer the data to.

27p254

3. Touch the “Overwrite” or “Add To”switch.

206

27p255

4. Transfer the phone book data to thesystem using the Bluetooth� phone.

This screen appears while transferring.To cancel it, touch the “Cancel” switch.If the transferring is interrupted on theway, the phone book data transferred untilthen can be memorized in the system.

27p256

5. When this screen is displayed, thetransfer is completed.

27p257

When this screen is displayed, try thetransfer operation again.

207

27p258

� Registering the phone book data

You can register the phone book data.

1. Touch the “Register” switch.

27p259

2. Touch the desired switch to edit thephone book.

27p260

3. When you complete the edit, touchthe “OK” switch.

208

27p261

� Editing the name

When you do not input the name, thenumber is displayed.

1. Touch the “Name” switch.

27p262


27p263

� Editing the phone number

You can register a phone number in“TEL1” and “TEL 2” separately. Up to2 numbers a person can be registered.

1. Touch the “TEL 1” or “TEL 2”switch.

209

27p264

2. Input the number and touch ”OK”.

27p265

3. Select the desired icon.

27p266

� Selecting the group

You can set a group for a contact (forexample: “Family”, “Friends”, “Of-fice”...). It will then be easier for youto find this contact when needed, byusing the group display.

You can select “No group” or “Group01” to “Group 19”.

“No group” is displayed if you do not setthe group.

1. Touch the “Group” switch.

210

27p267

2. Select the desired group.

27p268

� Setting the voice recognition

You can set the voice recognition. Upto 20 numbers can be registered for thevoice recognition.

1. Touch the “Voice Rec.” switch.

27p269

2. Select the phone number and touchthe “REC” switch to record a voicetag.

211

27p270

3. Touch the “PLAY” switch to play thevoice tag.

If you want to delete it, touch the “Delete”switch and “OK”.

27p271

� Adding data to the phone book

You can add data to the phone book.

1. Touch the “Add to” switch.

27p272

2. Select the data you want to add logdata to.

212

27p273

3. Confirm the added data on thescreen and touch “OK”.

27p274

� Editing the data

You can edit the registered data.

1. Touch the “Edit” switch.

27p272

2. Select the data you want to edit.

213

27p275

3. Touch the desired switch.

When you edit the data, touch “OK”.

27p276

When you also touch the “Edit” switchon this screen, you can edit it.

27p277

� Deleting the data

You can delete the data.

When you release your vehicle, deleteall your data on the system.

1. Touch the “Delete” switch of “PhoneBook”.

214

27p272

2. Touch the desired switch.

27p278


27p193

You can also delete it in the followingway.

1. Touch the “Phone Book” switch.

215

27p194

2. Select the desired data.

27p279

3. Touch the “Delete” switch.

27p280


216

27p281

� Deleting all the phone data

1. Touch the “Delete All” switch of“Phone book”.

27p282

2. Select the deleting method.

Group Data deleting all the phone. . . . . . . data in group

All Contact Data deleting all the phone. . data

3. When you select “Group Data”, the“Select Group” screen is displayed.

27p283

4. Select the desired group.

217

27p284


27p193

You can also delete it in the followingway.

1. Touch the “Phone Book” switch.

27p285

2. Touch the “Delete All” switch.

218

27p286


27p287

� Registering a group name

You can register 20 groups. “NoGroup”, “Group 01” − “Group 19” areregistered by default.

You can change “Group 01” − “Group 19”into desired names.

1. Touch the “Register” switch of“Group name”.

27p288

2. Select the group you want to regis-ter.

219

27p289

3. When you complete all the edit,touch the “OK” switch.

27p290

� Selecting a group icon

1. Touch the “Icon” switch.

27p291

2. Select the desired icon.

220

27p292

� Editing a group name

1. Touch the “Name” switch.

27p293


27p294

� Deleting a group name

You can delete the group names indi-vidually or all at once. If you delete agroup name, that group will return tothe default setting. (excluding “NoGroup”)

1. Touch the “Delete” switch of “GroupName”.

221

27p288

2. Select the group you want to deletethe name of.

27p295


27p296

� Deleting all the group names

1. Touch the “Delete All” switch of“Group Name”.

222

27p297


27p298

� Deleting the log data

You can delete the log data individuallyor all at once.

When you release your vehicle, deleteall the data on the system.

a) individually

1. Touch the “Delete” switch on the“Log Data” screen.

27p299


223

27p300

b) all at once

1. Touch the “Delete All” switch on the“Outgoing Calls” or “Incoming Calls”screen.

27p301


(f) Setting the security

When you set the security, you can pre-vent people from using some functionsof the hands−free system. It is usefulwhen you leave your vehicle with thehotel or you do not want others to seethe data you registered.

When you set or unlock the security, youhave to input the security code. Be sureto change the default code when you usethe security for the first time.

224

27p302

� Changing the security code

The security code is 4 digits and thedefault is “0000”.

1. Touch the “Phone Book Lock”switch.

27p303

2. Touch the “Change” switch.

27p304

3. Input the security code.

Choose a new code that is hard for otherpeople to know.

When you change the security code, donot forget the code. The dealers cannotunlock the security when you forget it.

If you forget the security code, initializeyour personal data. (See “Initializing thesecurity code” on page 226.)

Each time you touch “�”, an inputted digitis deleted.

225

27p305


� Phone Book Lock

When you set the phone book lock, youcan have the following functionslocked.

� Display of the phone book screen andtransferring, registering, editing, delet-ing the phone book data.

� Display of speed dial screen, register-ing, deleting the speed dial and speeddialing.

� Display of the other party’s name forcalls being received or made.

� Display of dialed numbers screen andreceived calls screen, deleting dialednumbers and received numbers.

� Display of phone information screen.

� Changing the security code.

When you set this function, the speed dialscreen is not displayed while you are driv-ing.

27p306

1. Touch the “ON” switch.

226

27p307

2. Input the security code and touch“OK”.

27p308

� Initializing the security code


1. Touch the “Default” switch.

27p309

2. Input the security code and touch“OK”.

227

27p310


27p311

(a) Selecting a Bluetooth� phone

In case you register more than oneBluetooth� phone, you need to choosea favorite one.

1. Touch the “Settings” switch to dis-play “Settings” screen.

27p312

2. Touch the “Select Telephone” switchto display “Select Telephone” screen.You can select the Bluetooth� phonefrom a maximum of 6 numbers.

“Empty” is displayed when you have notregistered a Bluetooth� phone yet.

Bluetooth� mark is displayed when youchoose the phone.

—Setting a Bluetooth� phone

228

27p313

Although you can register up to 6Bluetooth� phones in the system, only oneBluetooth� phone can function at a time.

27p314

3. Touch the “OK” switch.

27p315

When the result message is displayed,you can use the Bluetooth� phone.

229

27p316

When another Bluetooth� phone is try-ing to connect, this screen is displayed.

Touch the “Yes” or “No” switch.

(b) Displaying Bluetooth� information

You can see or set the information ofthe Bluetooth� phone on the system.

Device Name the name of the. . Bluetooth� phone whichis displayed on thescreen. You can changeit into a desired name.

Bluetooth� Device Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the address peculiar tothe system. You cannotchange it.

27p317

1. Select the desired phone and touchthe “Information” switch.

230

27p318


27p319

3. When you complete the setting,touch “ ”.

27p318

(c) Changing a Device Name

You can change a device name. If youchange a device name, the name regis-tered in your cellular phone is notchanged.


231

27p320

2. Use the software keyboard to inputthe device name.

(d) Changing the Bluetooth� settings

You can change the display and settingsof Bluetooth� information on the system.

The information displays the followingitems.

Device Name the name in the. . Bluetooth� network. Youcan change it.

Passkey the password when you. . . . . . . register your cellularphone in the system. Youcan change it into thefigure of 4−8 digits.

Bluetooth� Device Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the address peculiar tothe system. You can notchange it. If you haveregistered two Bluetooth�phones with the sameDevice Name or Passkeyand you cannotdistinguish one from theother, refer to it.

27p321

When you change the device name orPasskey, do the following.

1. Touch the “Bluetooth*” switch.


232

27p322

2. Touch the “Change” of “DeviceName” or “Passkey”.

27p323

3. Use the software keyboard to inputthe device name.

You can input up to 20 characters.

27p324

4. Input a Passkey with 4 − 8 digits.

When you touch “�”, the inputted digit isdeleted.

233

27p325

5. When you complete the setting,touch “ ”.

27p326

(e) Initializing the Bluetooth� settings.


1. Touch the “Default” switch.

27p327


234

27p328

(f) Deleting a Bluetooth� phone

1. Touch the “Delete” switch of“Bluetooth* Telephone”.


27p329

2. Select the telephone you want to de-lete and touch “OK”.

27p330


235

27p331

When you delete the telephone whileanother Bluetooth� phone is connected,this message is displayed.


27p332

(g) Displaying the information of theBluetooth� phone you delete

You can display the information of theBluetooth� phone before you delete itand you can make sure whether thetelephone you delete is correct or not.

1. Select the telephone you want todisplay the information about.

27p319

2. When you complete confirming it,touch “ ”.

236

27p335

The speech command system enablesyou to operate the hands−free systemby giving a command.

1. Push the speech command switch.

A beep sounds and on−screen message isdisplayed with an indicator at the top left.

27p203

2. Give a command while an indicatoris shown in the display. If you wantto check the command list, touchthe “Help” switch to display the Helpscreen. (See “Help screen” on page237.) When you touch the “Cancel”,the previous screen returns.

If the hands−free system does not re-spond or the confirmation screen does notdisappear, push the speech commandswitch and try again.

If no command is given, a beep soundsand the indicator disappears 6 secondslater.

If the system does not recognize yourspeech, the system will respond with thismessage (“System does not recognize thiscommand, rephrase your command.”).Start the operation from the beginning.

—Speech command system

237

27p334

Microphone

It is unnecessary to speak directly intothe microphone when giving a com-mand.

This system has a function which dis-plays the voice recognition help screen.You can see the command list and op-erating guide on it.

27p361

(a) Command List

1. Touch the “Command List” tab onthe upper side of the screen.

2. Select the desired category bytouching the buttons on the rightside of the “Command List” screen.*

3. You can scroll through the command

list by touching “ ” or “ ”switch.

*: For the vehicles without Navigation Sys-tem, “Tel” only is shown.

Touch the “OK” switch after you check it.

—Help screen

238

27p362

(b) Operating Guide

1. Touch the “Operating Guide” tab onthe upper side of the screen.

2. Select the desired category bytouching the buttons on the rightside of the “Operating Guide”screen.*

3. You can scroll through the list of the

operating guide by touching “ ” or

“ ” switch.

*: For the vehicles without Navigation Sys-tem, “Tel” only is shown.

Touch the “OK” switch after you check it.

Adjustment

26p024a

Type 1 Type 2 and Type3

Push the “DISPLAY” button to displaythe “Display” screen.

27p142a

Type 1 and Type 2

26p026b

Type 3

239

Contrast and brightness adjustment

CONTRAST “+”: Strengthens the contrast of the screen.

CONTRAST “–”: Weakens the contrast of the screen.

BRIGHTNESS “+”: Brightens the screen.

BRIGHTNESS “–”: Darkens the screen.

The screen turns off when you touch the“SCREEN OFF”. To turn the displayscreen back on, push any bezel switchsuch as “INFO”, etc. The selected screenappears.

27p146a

Type 1 and Type 2

26P051b

Type 3

Depending on the position of the head-light switch, the screen changes to theday mode or night mode.

To display the screen in the day modeeven with the headlight switch on, touch“DAY MODE” on the adjustment screen forbrightness and contrast control.

However, if the km/h or MPH button is on,mode switching cannot be done. It re-mains in the day mode. In this case, “DAYMODE” is not shown on the screen.

If the screen is set in the day mode withthe headlight switch turned to on, thiscondition is memorized in the system evenwith the hybrid system turned off.

240

Outside temperature display

27p155b

Type 1 and Type 2

26p046b

Type 3

The outside temperature is shown rang-ing from −30�C (−22�F) up to 50�C(122�F) at the upper right of the energyconsumption or energy monitor screenor the upper left/right of the air condi-tioner screen.

Separate to the above screen, when theoutside temperature drops below 3�C(37�F), * and the outside temperature

are displayed in the upper portion of thescreen for a few seconds.

(This outside temperature is displayedeven if on the map screen etc.)

*: may not be displayed depending on

the display type.

241

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAudio systemReference 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio operation 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio operation (XMr satellite radio broadcast) 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact disc player operation (Type 1 and Type 2) 266. . . . . . . . . . . . Compact disc player operation (Type 3) 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP3/WMA player operation 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio remote controls 277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUX adapter 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio system operating hints 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 8

242

1. Multi−information display screen(See page 248 for details.)

2. Ejecting a compact disc(See page 266 for details.)

3. Compact disc slot(See page 266 for details.)

4. Frequency tuning and file search(See page 253 and 274 for details.)

5. Scan tuning(See page 255 for details.)

6. Compact disc or AUX adapter mode button(See page 267 for details.)

7. Radio mode button(See page 252 for details.)

8. Radio mode: Seek tuning(See page 254 for details.)

Compact disc mode: Direct access to a

desired program (See page 268 for details.)

9. Turning the system on(See page 247 for details.)

Reference

�Type 1

26p202c

WithNavigationSystem

243

10. Adjusting the volume(See page 247 for details.)

11. Compact disc load button(See page 266 for details.)

12. Audio operation screen display button(See page 248 for details.)

244




4. Frequency tuning and file search(See page 253 and 274 for details.)


6. Compact disc or AUX adapter mode button(See page 267 for details.)



Compact discmode: Direct access to a

desired program(See page 268 for details.)




�Type 2

26p201b

245




4. Frequency tuning(See page 253 for details.)


6. Compact disc mode button(See page 271 for details.)



Compact discmode: Direct access to a

desired program(See page 272 for details.)




�Type 3

26p014e

246

This section describes some of the basicfeatures of the Toyota audio system.Some information may not pertain to yoursystem.

Your audio system works when the hybridsystem is in “ACC” or “IG−ON”.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not leave the audio onlonger than necessary when thehybrid system is not running.

26p195a

Type 1

Type 2 and Type 3

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR” button to turn the audio sys-tem on and off. The system turns on inthe last mode used.

Using your audio system——Some basics

247

Type 1 and Type 2

Type 3

VOLUME CONTROL

To adjust the volume, push and turn the“VOL”.

Type 1

Type 2

248

Type 3

Push the “AM”, “AM·SAT”, “FM”,“DISC” or “DISC·AUX” button to turnon that mode. The selected mode turnson directly.

Push these buttons if you want to switchfrom one mode to another.

If the disc is not set, the compact discplayer does not turn on.

26p260

Radio (Type 1)

Radio (Type 2)

26p136a

Radio (Type 3)

249

26p205c

Compact disc (Type 1)


26p138a


The switches for radio and compactdisc player operation are displayed onthe liquid crystal display. Touch themlightly and directly on the screen.

The selected switch is highlighted in greenor orange.

26p206b

TONE AND BALANCE

Touching the “SOUND” switch on thescreen displays the sound adjustmentscreen.

250

TREB “+” or “–”: Adjusts high−pitchedtones.

MID “+” or “–” (Type 1 only): Adjustsmid−pitched tones.

BASS “+” or “–”: Adjusts low−pitchedtones.

“FRONT” or “REAR”: Adjusts sound bal-ance between the front and rear speakers.

“L” or “R”: Adjusts sound balance be-tween the left and right speakers.

“OK”: The previous screen returns.

How good an audio program sounds toyou is largely determined by the mix ofthe treble, mid−range, and bass levels.In fact, different kinds of music and vocalprograms usually sound better with differ-ent mixes of treble, mid−range and bass.

A good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening toa stereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

26p261

Type 1

Type 2

251

AUTOMATIC SOUND LEVELIZER (ASL)(Type 1 and Type 2 only)

When the audio sound becomes difficult tobe heard due to road noise, wind noise,etc. during driving, the system adjusts tothe optimum volume and tone quality ac-cording to the noise level.

Vehicles with compact disc changer:

Touch the “ASL” switch.

When the system is on, the sound adjust-ment level is displayed on the screen.

Vehicles without compact disc changer:

Touch the “DSP” switch to display the“ASL” screen.

Touch “High”, “Mid” or “Low” and then“OK”.

When you touch “High”, you can obtainhigher sensitivity of the sound levelizer.When you touch “Low”, the sensitivity willbe lowered.

Touching “Off” turns the system off.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

To remove an antenna on the roof, care-fully turn it counterclockwise.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure to remove it before drivingthrough an automatic car wash.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER

When you insert a disc, gently push it inwith the label side up.

The discs set in the player are playedcontinuously, starting with disc number 1.The disc number of the disc currently be-ing played, the track number and the timefrom the beginning of the program appearon the display.

Type 1 only:When play of one disc ends, the firsttrack of the following disc starts. Whenplay of the final disc ends, play of thefirst disc starts again.

The player will skip any empty disc num-ber.

252

NOTICE

� Do not stack up two discs for in-sertion, or it will damage the com-pact disc player. Insert only onecompact disc into a slot at a time.

� Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

Type 1

26p124

Type 2 and Type 3

(a) Listening to the radio

Push these buttons to choose either anAM or FM station.

“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” appears on the dis-play.

If your vehicle is equipped with satelliteradio broadcast system, when you pushthe “AM·SAT” button, “AM”, “SAT1”,“SAT2” or “SAT3” station appears on thedisplay. For details about satellite radiobroadcast, see “Radio operation (XM� sat-ellite radio broadcast)” on page 260.

Radio operation

253

26P197

Type 1 and Type 2

26p125

Type 3

Push and turn this knob to step up thestation band or to step down.

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to pre-vent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion. In this case, “ST” disappears fromthe display.

26p260

Type 1

Type 2

254

26p141a

Type 3

(b) Presetting a station

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. Touch one of the station selectorswitches (1−6) and hold it until abeep is heard. This sets the stationto the switch and the frequency ap-pears on the switch.

Each switch can store FM1, FM2 and AM.To change the preset station to a differentone, follow the same procedure.

The preset station memory is cancelledwhen the power source is interrupted bybattery disconnection or a blown fuse.

(c) Selecting a station

Tune in the desired station using one ofthe following methods.

Preset tuning: Touch the switch (1−6) forthe station you want. The switch (1−6) ishighlighted in green and station frequencyappears on the display.

Manual tuning: Turn the “TUNE·FILE” and“TUNE” knob briefly. Each time you turnthe knob, the radio will step up or downto another frequency.

Seek tuning: Push the “SEEK·TRACK”button on either side. The radio will beginseeking up or down for a station of thenearest frequency and will stop on recep-tion. Each time you push the button, thestations will be searched out one afteranother.

26p262

Type 1

Type 2

255

26p126

Type 3

Scan tuning: Push the “SCAN” button ortouch the “SCAN” switch (AM mode only)briefly. “SCAN” appears on the display.The radio will find the next station up ordown the band, stay there for a few se-conds, and then scan again. To select astation, push the “SCAN” button a secondtime.

Preset scan tuning: Push the “SCAN”button or touch the “SCAN” switch (AMmode only) and hold it until you hear abeep. “P. SCAN” appears on the display.The radio will tune in the next preset sta-tion up or down the band, stay there fora few seconds, and then move to the nextpreset station. To select a station, pushthe “SCAN” button a second time.

26p263

Type 1

Type 2

256

26p142a

Type 3

(d) RDS (Radio Data System)

(1) Program type

Each time you touch the “TYPE �” or“TYPE �” switch, the program typechanges as in the following:

� ROCK

� EASY LIS (Easy listening)

� CLS JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)

� R&B (Rhythm and Blues)

� INFORM (Information)

� RELIGION

� MISC

� ALERT (Emergency message)

26p264

Type 1

Type 2

257

26p257

Type 3

When you touch the “TYPE �” or “TYPE�”, “TYPE SEEK” switch appears. Touchthe switch and the system starts to seekthe station in the relevant program type.

26p265

Type 1

Type 2

26p258

Type 3

258

(2) Traffic program:

A station that regularly broadcasts traf-fic information is automatically located.

When you touch the “TRAF” switch,“TRAF SEEK” appears on the display andthe radio will start seeking any traffic pro-gram station.

If any traffic program station is not found,“NOTHING” appears and the previousmode returns.

If the traffic program station is found, thename for traffic program station is dis-played and “TRAF” is lit for a while untiltraffic announcement is received.

26p266

Type 1

Type 2

26p259

Type 3

259

(3) Radio text

If the system receives a radio text fromRDS station, “MSG” appears on the dis-play. Touch the “MSG” switch, and a textmessage is displayed on the screen.

26p267

Type 1

Type 2

26p145b

Type 3

In case a text message is not acceptedin a screen, you can touch the “MSG”switch and hold it to display the rest ofthe message.

When the system can show the stationname, “RDS” appears on the display.Each time you touch the “MSG” switch,indication on the display changes from theband to the station name, a radio text inthis order. After six seconds passes, indi-cation returns to the band.

260

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast inyour vehicle, an additional genuine Toyotasatellite receiver and antenna must bepurchased and installed, and the subscrip-tion to the XM� satellite radio is neces-sary.

(a) How to subscribe to an XM� satel-lite radio

An XM� satellite radio is a tuner designedexclusively to receive broadcasts providedunder a separate subscription. Availabilityis limited to the 48 contiguous states.

How to subscribe:

You must enter into a separate serviceagreement with the XM� radio in order toreceive satellite broadcast programming inthe vehicle. Additional activation and ser-vice subscription fees apply that are notincluded in the purchase price of the ve-hicle and optional digital satellite tuner.For complete information on subscriptionrates and terms, or to subscribe to theXM� radio, visit XM� on the web atwww.xmradio.com or call an XM�’s Listen-er Care at (800) 967−2346. The XM�radio is solely responsible for the quality,availability and content of the satellite ra-dio services provided, which are subjectto the terms and conditions of the XM�radio customer service agreement.

Customers should have their radio IDready; the radio ID can be found by se-lecting the “channel 000” on the radio.For details, see the “Displaying the radioID” that follows.

All fees and programming are the respon-sibility of the XM� satellite radio and aresubject to change.

Satellite tuner technology notice:

Toyota satellite radio tuners are awardedType Approval Certificates from XM� Sat-ellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibilitywith the services offered by the XM� sat-ellite radio.

(b) Displaying the radio ID

Each XM� tuner is identified with a uniqueradio ID. You will need the radio ID whenactivating XM� service or when reportinga problem.

If you select the “CH 000” using the“TUNE·FILE” knob, the ID code of 8 al-phanumeric characters appears. If youselect another channel, display of the IDcode is canceled. The channel (000) al-ternates the display between the radio IDand the specific radio ID code.

(c) Listening to the satellite radio

Push the “AM·SAT” button to choose aSAT channel.

“AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” appearson the display.

Radio operation (XM� satelliteradio broadcast) (Type 1 only)

261

26P197

Turn this knob to select the next orprevious channel.

If you turn continuously, you can rapidlyscroll forward or down through the chan-nels.

26p213b

(d) Presetting a channel

1. Tune in the desired channel.

2. Touch one of the channel selectorswitches (1−6) and hold it until abeep is heard. This sets the chan-nel to the switch and the frequencyappears on the switch.

Each switch can store three SAT chan-nels. To change the preset channel to adifferent one, follow the same procedure.

The preset channel memory is cancelledwhen the power source is interrupted bybattery disconnection or a blown fuse.

(e) Selecting a channel

Tune in the desired channel using one ofthe following methods.

Preset tuning: Touch the switch (1−6) forthe channel you want. The switch (1−6) ishighlighted in green.

Manual tuning within the channel cate-gory: Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob. Theradio will step up or down the channel.

Manual tuning within the current chan-nel category: Push the “SEEK·TRACK”button on either side. The radio will stepup or down the channel within the currentchannel category. Touch the “TYPE SEEK”switch. The radio will step up the channelwithin the current channel category.

262

To scan the currently selected channelcategory: Touch the “TYPE SCAN” switchor push the “SCAN” button briefly.“SCAN” appears on the display. The ra-dio will find the next channel in the samechannel category, stay there for a fewseconds, and then scan again. To selecta channel, touch the “TYPE SCAN” switchor push the “SCAN” button a second time.

To scan the preset channels: Push the“SCAN” button and hold it until you heara beep. “P.SCAN” appears on the display.The radio will find the next preset chan-nel, stay there for a few seconds, andthen move to the next preset channel. Toselect a channel, push the “SCAN” buttona second time.

(f) Channel category

Touch either “TYPE ” or “TYPE ”switch to switch to the next or previouscategory.

263

26p216c

(g) Displaying the title and name

When you touch the “TEXT” switch, thesong/program title and the artist name/fea-ture are displayed.

Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can bedisplayed. (Some information will not befully displayed.)

264

(h) If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions

When problems occur with the XM� tuner, a message will appear on the display. Referring to the table below to identify the problem,take the suggested corrective action.

ANTENNAThe XM� antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM� antenna cable is attached securely.

A short−circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified dealer.

UPDATING

You have not subscribed to the XM� satellite radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryptioncode. Contact the XM� satellite radio for subscription information. When a contact is canceled, you canchoose the “CH000” and all free−to−air channels.

The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns tothe previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you wantto listen to the premium channel, contact the XM� satellite radio.

NO SIGNALThe XM� signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stron-ger signal.

LOADING The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information.

OFF AIR The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

−−−−−There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No actionneeded.

−−−The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to theprevious channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.

The XM� Listener Care Center is also available on the phone, please call (800) 967−2346 during the following hours:Monday – Saturday: 6 a.m. – 2 a.m. Eastern TimeSunday: 8 a.m – 8 p.m. Eastern Time

265

NOTICE

This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aclass B digital device, pursuant toPart 15 of the FCC Rules. Theselimits are designed to provide reason-able protection against harmful inter-ference in a residential installation.This equipment generates, uses andcan radiate radio frequency energyand, if not installed and used in ac-cordance with the instructions, maycause harmful interference to radiocommunications. However, there isno guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmfulinterference to radio or television re-ception, which can be determined byturning the equipment off and on, theuser is encouraged to try to correctthe interference by one or more ofthe following measures:

— Reorient or relocate the receivingantenna.

— Increase the separation betweenthe equipment and receiver.

— Connect the equipment into an out-let on a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

— Consult the dealer or an experi-enced radio/TV technician for help.

Information to user

Alternation or modifications carriedout without appropriate authorizationmay invalidate the user’s right to op-erate the equipment.

This XM� tuner supports “Audio Ser-vices” (Music and Talk) of only XM�satellite radio and “Text Information”,linked to the respective “Audio Ser-vices”.

*Text Information includes, StationName, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title andCategory Name.

266

(a) Inserting or ejecting compact disc

Type 1:

� Setting a single compact disc:

1. Push the “LOAD” button briefly.

The amber indicators at both ends of theslot blinking. The amber blinking indicatorschange to continuous green illumination.

2. Insert only one disc.

You can set a disc at the lowest emptydisc number.

After insertion, the set disc is automatical-ly loaded.

If the label faces down, the disc cannotbe played. In this case, “CD CHECK” ap-pears on the display.

If you need to insert the next disc, repeatthe same procedure to insert another disc.

� Setting all the discs:

1. Push the “LOAD” button until youhear a beep.

The amber indicators at both ends of theslot blinking. The amber blinking indicatorschange to continuous green illumination.

2. Insert only one disc.

The amber indicators blink.

3. Insert the next disc after the amberblinking indicators change to contin-uous green illumination.

4. Repeat this procedure until you in-sert all the discs.

To cancel the operation, push the “LOAD”button.

Your automatic changer can store up to 6discs.

If you do not insert the discs within 15seconds after pushing the “LOAD” button,the operation will be canceled automatical-ly.

NOTICE

Do not insert one disc stacked on topof another one or feed them in con-tinuously, to prevent discs from get-ting stuck in the player.

Compact disc player operation(Type 1 and Type 2)

267

26p129c

� Ejecting a single alone:

1. Touch the switch (1−6) to highlightthe disc number you want to eject.

2. Push the “ ” button for the com-pact disc briefly.

At this time, the amber indicators of theslot start blinking.

� Ejecting all the discs:

Push the “ ” button for the compactdisc until you hear a beep.

26p205c

The numbers of the trays where the com-pact disc is not set are dimmed.

Type 2:

When you insert a disc, the player willautomatically start. To eject the disc,

push the “ ” button.

(b) Playing a compact disc

Type 1:

Push the “DISC·AUX” button if the discis already loaded in the player.

“CD CHANGER” appears on the display.

The discs set in the player are playedcontinuously, starting with the last discyou inserted. The disc number of the disccurrently being played, the track numberand the time from the beginning of theprogram are shown on the display.

When play of one disc ends, the firsttrack of the following disc starts. Whenplay of the final disc ends, play of thefirst disc starts again.

268

The player will skip any empty disc trays.

When the AUX adapter is in use, eachtime you push the “DISC·AUX” button, theaudio switches the compact disc modeand AUX mode alternately. For detailsabout AUX adapter, see page 278.

Type 2:

Push the “DISC·AUX” button if the discis already loaded in the player.

“CD” appears on the display.

The discs set in the player are playedcontinuously. The track number and thetime from the beginning of the programare shown on the display.

26p205c

(c) Selecting a desired disc (Type 1 only)

Touch the desired disc number.

The selected disc number is highlighted ingreen.

The player will start playing the selecteddisc from the first track.

(d) Selecting a desired track

“SEEK·TRACK” button:

Push the “SEEK·TRACK” button. The play-er will start playing the selected trackfrom the beginning.

Track list screen:

Touch the desired track displayed on thetrack list screen.

The track list screen cannot be displayedwhile driving.

For details about the track list screen, see“Displaying the track list” on page 270.

269

(e) Fast Forward/Reverse

Push the “SEEK·TRACK” button and holdit to fast forward/reverse the disc. Whenyou release the switch, the player willresume playing.

When fast forwarding, if you reach theend of the final track, the player will goback to the start track and continue op-eration.

When reversing, if you reach the begin-ning of the start track, reverse is can-celled, even if you continue to hold downthe button.

26p234b

(f) Repeating the same track

Touch the “RPT” switch briefly. When thetrack is finished, the player will automati-cally go back to the beginning of the trackand play the track again. To cancel it,touch the “RPT” switch once again.

(g) Repeating the same disc

Touch the “RPT” switch and hold it untilyou hear a beep. When the disc is fin-ished, the player will automatically goback to the beginning of the disc and playthe disc again. To cancel it, touch the“RPT” switch once again.

26p235b

(h) Listening to the tracks in the discyou are listening to, in random or-der

Touch the “RAND” switch briefly, the sys-tem selects a track in the disc you arecurrently listening to. To cancel it, touchthe “RAND” switch once again.

(i) Listening to the tracks in all thediscs set, in random order

Touch the “RAND” switch and hold it untilyou hear a beep, the system selects atrack in all the discs which are set andplays it. To cancel it, touch the “RAND”switch once again.

270

26p218c

(j) Searching for a desired track

Touch the “SCAN” switch briefly, the play-er will play the next track for 10 seconds,then scan again. To select a track, touchthe “SCAN” switch a second time.

After all the tracks are scanned in onepass, normal play resumes.

(k) Searching for a desired disc (Type 1 only)

Touch the “SCAN” switch and hold it untilyou hear a beep, the track at the begin-ning of each disc will be played for 10seconds. To continue listening to the trackof your choice, touch the “SCAN” switcha second time.

After all the discs are scanned in onepass, normal play resumes.

26p236b

(l) Displaying the track list

Touch the “TRACK LIST” switch.

The track list screen will be displayed.

If there are more than 6 tracks, touch “”or “” to change the page.

If you touch a track, that track will beplayed.

Only track names of 13 characters or lesscan be displayed. Furthermore, tracknames may not be displayed correctly orat all, depending on the recorded content.

271

(m) If the player malfunctions

If the player or another unit equipped withthe player malfunctions, your audio systemwill display the following error messages.

If “CD CHECK” appears on the display,it indicates that the disc is dirty, damagedor it was inserted up side down. Clean thedisc or insert it correctly.

If “CD ERROR” appears on the display,the following causes are possible.

� There is trouble inside the system.Eject the disc.

� The inside of the player unit may betoo hot due to the very high ambienttemperature. Eject the disc and allowthe player to cool down.

If the malfunction is not rectified, takeyour vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

(a) Inserting or ejecting compact disc

When you insert a disc, the player willautomatically start. To eject the disc,

push the “ ” button.


Push the “DISC” button if the disc isalready loaded in the player.

“CD” appears on the display.

The discs set in the player are playedcontinuously. The track number and thetime from the beginning of the programare shown on the display.

Compact disc player operation(Type 3)

272

(c) Selecting a desired track

“SEEK·TRACK” button: Use for directaccess to a desired track.

Push either side of the “SEEK·TRACK”button. The player will start playing theselected track from the beginning.

Fast forward: Touch the “ ” switch andhold it to fast forward the disc. When yourelease the switch, the compact disc play-er will resume playing from that position.

Reverse: Touch the “ ” switch and holdit to reverse the disc. When you releasethe switch, the compact disc player willresume playing.

(d) Searching for a desired track

Touch the “SCAN” switch.

“SCAN” will be highlighted in green. Thecompact disc player will play the nexttrack for 10 seconds, then scan again.To select a track, touch the “SCAN”switch a second time. If the player reach-es the end of the disc, it will continuescanning at track 1.

After all the tracks are scanned in onepass, normal play resumes.

(e) Other compact disc player functions

“RPT” switch: Use it for automatic repeatof the track you are currently listening to.

Touch the switch while the track is play-ing. When the track is finished, the playerwill automatically go back to the beginningof the track and play the track again. Tocancel it, touch the switch once again.

273

“RAND” switch: Use it for automatic andrandom selection of the disc which youare currently listening to.

When the switch is touched, the systemselects a track in the disc you are cur-rently listening to. To cancel it, touch theswitch once again.

“TITLE” switch: Use it for displaying thedisc and track title while the CD−TEXTdisc is playing.

The switch is not displayed on the screenwhile the CD−TEXT disc is not playing.Up to 29 letters can be displayed. Tocancel it, touch the “TITLE OFF” switch.

(f) If the player malfunctions







(a) Inserting or ejecting MP3/WMA disc

Refer to “(a) Inserting or ejecting compactdisc” on page 266.


Refer to “(b) Playing a compact disc” onpage 267.

(c) Selecting a desired disc (Type 1 only)

Refer to “(c) Selecting a desired disc” onpage 268.

MP3/WMA player operation(Type 1 and Type 2)

274

26p239b

(d) Selecting a desired folder

“FOLDER” switch:

Touch either side of the “FOLDER” switch.The player will start playing the file in theselected folder.

Folder list screen:

Touch the desired folder displayed on thefolder list screen.

The folder list screen cannot be displayedwhile driving.

For details the folder list screen, see “Dis-playing the folder list” on page 276.

26p240a

(e) Selecting a desired file

“TRACK” button:

Push the “SEEK·TRACK” button. The play-er will start playing the selected file fromthe beginning.

File list screen:

Touch the desired file displayed on the filelist screen.

The file list screen cannot be displayedwhile driving.

For details about the file list screen, see“Displaying the file list” on page 276.

“TUNE·FILE” knob:

Turn the knob clockwise to search up thefiles. Turn the knob counterclockwise tosearch down the files.

275

(f) Fast forward/reverse

Push the “SEEK·TRACK” button and holdit to fast forward/reverse the disc. Whenyou release the switch, the player willresume playing.

When fast forwarding, if you reach theend of the final file, the player will goback to the start file and continue opera-tion.

When reversing, if you reach the begin-ning of the start file, reverse is cancelled,even if you continue to hold down thebutton.

26p241b

(g) Repeating the same file

Touch the “RPT” switch briefly. When thefile is finished, the player will automatical-ly go back to the beginning of the file andplay the file again. To cancel it, touch the“RPT” switch once again.

(h) Repeating the same folder

Touch the “RPT” switch and hold it untilyou hear a beep. When the folder is fin-ished, the player will automatically goback to the beginning of the folder andplay the folder again. To cancel it, touchthe “RPT” switch once again.

26p242b

(i) Listening to the files in the folderyou are listening to, in random or-der

Touch the “RAND” switch briefly, the sys-tem selects a file in the folder you arecurrently listening to. To cancel it, touchthe “RAND” switch once again.

(j) Listening to the files in all the fol-ders, in random order

Touch the “RAND” switch and hold it untilyou hear a beep, the system selects a filein all the folders which are set and playsit. To cancel it, touch the “RAND” switchonce again.

276

26p243b

(k) Searching for a desired file

Touch the “SCAN” switch briefly, and theplayer will play the next file for 10 se-conds, then scan again. To select a file,touch the “SCAN” switch a second time.

After all the files are scanned in onepass, normal play resumes.

(l) Searching for a desired folder

Touch the “SCAN” switch and hold it untilyou hear a beep, the file at the beginningof each folder will be played for 10 se-conds. To continue listening to the file ofyour choice, touch the “SCAN” switch asecond time.

After all the folders are scanned in onepass, normal play resumes.

26p244b

(m) Displaying the folder list

Touch the “FOLDER LIST” switch.

The folder list screen will be displayed.

If there are more than 6 folders, touch“” or “” to change the page.

If you touch a folder, that folder will beplayed.

Up to 13 characters of folder name canbe displayed. However, folder names maynot be displayed correctly or at all, de-pending on the recorded content.

If you touch the “FILE” switch, the file listscreen will be displayed.

26p245b

(n) Displaying the file list

Touch the “FILE” switch.

The file list screen will be displayed.

If there are more than 6 files, touch “”or “” to change the page.

If you touch a file, that file will be played.

Up to 13 characters of file name can bedisplayed. However, file names may notbe displayed correctly or at all, dependingon the recorded content.

If you touch the “FOLDER” switch, thefolder list screen will be displayed.

277

26p246b

(o) Displaying the file information

Touch the “DETAIL” switch on the fold-er list or file list screen.

Up to 32 characters of album title, track,artist’s name or music genre can be dis-played. However, some information maynot be displayed correctly or at all, de-pending on the recorded content.

(p) If the player malfunctions






If “NO DATA DISC” appears on the dis-play, it indicates that a disc with no MP3or WMA data has been inserted. Removethe disc from the player and insert a MP3or WMA data disc.


26p112

The switches are installed on the left sideof the steering pad.

“MODE” switch: Use this switch tochange the mode. If a compact disc is notinserted, the “CD” mode is skipped. Whenyou push the switch with the audio systemturned off, the audio system turns on.

“ ” switches: Use the switches to ad-just the volume. Push “+” to increase thevolume and “–” to decrease the volume.The volume continues to increase or de-crease while the switch is being pressed.

Audio remote controls (steering switches)

278

(a) When the radio mode is selected

“ ” or “ ” switch: Push this switch forseek tuning or to select a station.

� To select a preset station, push theswitch briefly. Do this again to selectthe next preset station.

� To seek a station, push and hold theswitch until you hear a beep. Do thisagain to find the next station. If youpush the switch on either side (“�” or“�”) during the seek mode, seekingwill be canceled.

� To step up or down the frequency,push and hold the switch even afteryou hear a beep. When you releasefrom the switch, the radio will beginseeking up or down for a station. Dothis again to find the next station.

(b) When the “CD” mode is selected

“ ” or “ ” switch: Use this switch toselect a desired track or disc.

� Push this switch briefly to select a de-sired track.

� To select a desired disc, push and holdthis switch until the desired number ofthe disc appears and you hear a beep.

(c) When the “MP3/WMA” mode is se-lected

“ ” or “ ” switch: Use this switch toselect a desired file or folder.

� Push this switch briefly to select a de-sired file.

� To select a desired folder, push andhold this switch until the desired folderappears and you hear a beep.

CAUTION

Operate the switches with due carewhile you are driving to avoid acci-dents.

28P129

An AUX adapter is installed in the rearconsole box.

By inserting a mini plug into the AUXadapter, you can listen to music from aportable audio device through the vehicle’sspeaker system.

To use the AUX adapter, switch to theAUX mode (external device mode) bypressing “DISC·AUX” button. When theAUX adapter is in use, “AUX” will appearon the display. To adjust the volume, turnthe “PWR·VOL” knob.

When using a portable audio device con-nected to the power outlet or cigarettelighter, noise may occur during playback.If this happens, use the power source ofthe portable audio device.

AUX adapter (Type 1 and Type2 only)

279

If you install an audio system other thana genuine audio system, you will not beable to use the AUX adapter.

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio system op-erations:

� Be careful not to spill beveragesover the audio system.

� The use of a cellular phone insideor near the vehicle may cause anoise from the speakers of the au-dio system which you are listeningto. However, this does not indicatea malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio—it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. And of course, radio signalshave a limited range. The farther you arefrom a station, the weaker its signal willbe. In addition, reception conditionschange constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate a prob-lem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each oth-er out, causing a momentary flutter orloss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weak-ened, and there is another strong stationnearby on the FM band, your radio maytune in the second station until the origi-nal signal can be picked up again.

Audio system operating hints

280

AM

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere—especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISCPLAYER AND DISCS

� The player is intended for use with12cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

� Extremely high temperatures can keepyour compact disc player from working.On hot days, use the air conditioningto cool the vehicle interior before youlisten to a disc.

� Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your compact disc player skip.

� If moisture gets into your compact discplayer, you may not hear any soundeven though your compact disc playerappears to be working. Remove thedisc from the player and wait until itdries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisiblelaser beam which could cause hazard-ous radiation exposure if directedoutside the unit. Be sure to operatethe player correctly.

� Use only compact discs marked asshown above. The following productsmay not be playable on your compactdisc player.

Copy−protected CDCD−R (CD−Recordable)CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)CD−ROM

281

Special shaped discs

Z17058

Transparent/translucent discs

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

NOTICE

� Do not use special shaped, trans-parent/translucent, low quality or la-beled discs such as those shown inthe illustrations. The use of suchdiscs may damage the player orchanger, or it may be impossible toeject the disc.

� This system is not designed for useof Dual Disc. Do not use Dual Discbecause it may cause damage tothe player or changer.

282

Correct Wrong

� Handle compact discs carefully, espe-cially when you are inserting them.Hold them on the edge and do notbend them. Avoid getting fingerprintson them, particularly on the shiny side.

� Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa track. (To see a pin hole, hold thedisc up to the light.)

� Remove discs from the compact discplayer when you are not listening tothem. Store them in their plastic casesaway from moisture, heat, and directsunlight.

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with asoft, lint−free cloth that has been damp-ened with water. Wipe in a straight linefrom the center to the edge of the disc(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventionalrecord cleaner or anti−static device.

MP3 WMA FILES

� MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA(Windows Media Audio) are audio com-pression standards.

� The MP3/WMA player can play MP3and WMA files on CD−ROM, CD−R andCD−RW discs.

The unit can play disc recordings com-patible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level2 and with the Romeo and Joliet filesystem.

� When naming an MP3 or WMA file,add the appropriate file extension (.mp3or .wma)

� The MP3/WMA player plays back fileswith .mp3 or .wma file extensions asMP3 or WMA files. To prevent noiseand playback errors, use the appropri-ate file extensions.

� Multi−session compatible CDs can alsobe played.

� MP3 files are compatible with the ID3Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2, andVer. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot dis-play disc title, track title and artistname in other formats.

283

� WMA files can contain a WMA tag thatis used in the same way as an ID3tag. WMA tags carry information suchas track title, artist name.

� The emphasis function is available onlywhen playing MP3/WMA files recordedat 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. (The systemcan play MP3 files with sampling fre-quencies of 16, 22.05, and 24 kHz.However, the emphasis function is notavailable for files recorded at these fre-quencies.)

� The sound quality of MP3/WMA filesgenerally improves with higher bitrates. In order to achieve a reasonablelevel of sound quality, discs recordedwith a bit rate of at least 128 kbps arerecommended.

Playable bit ratesMP3 files:MPEG1 LAYER3—64 to 320 kbpsMPEG2 LSF LAYER3—64 to 160 kbpsWMA files:

Ver. 7, 8 CBR—48 to 192 kbpsVer. 9 CBR—48 to 320 kbps

� The MP3/WMA player does not playback MP3/WMA files from discs record-er using packet write data transfer(UDF format). Discs should be re-corded using “per−mastering” softwarerather than packet−write software.

� M3u playlists are not compatible withthe audio player.

� MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PROformats are not compatible with the au-dio player.

� The MP3 player is compatible withVBR (Variable Bit Rate).

� When playing back files recorded asVBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the playtime will not be correctly displayed iffast−forward or reverse operations areused.

� It is not possible to check folders thatdo not include MP3/WMA files.

� MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 lev-els deep can be played. However, thestart of playback may be delayed whenusing discs containing numerous levelsof folders. For this reason, we recom-mend creating discs with no more thantwo levels of folders.

� It is possible to play up to 192 foldersor 255 files on one disc.

002.wma

003.mp3

Folder 2004.wma005.mp3

006.mp3

001.mp3

Folder 3

Folder 1

� The play order of the compact discwith the structure shown above is asfollows:

001.mp3 002.wma . . . 006.mp3

284

CD−R and CD−RW discs

� CD−R/CD−RW discs that have not beensubject to the “finalizing process” (aproc ess that allows discs to be playedon a conventional CD player) cannotbe played.

� It may not be possible to play CD−R/CD−RW discs recorded on a musicCD recorder or a personal computerbecause of disc characteristics,scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,condensation, etc. on the lens of theunit.

� It may not be possible to play discsrecorded on a personal computer de-pending on the application settings andthe environment. Record with the cor-rect format. (For details, contact theappropriate application manufacturers ofthe applications.)

� CD−R/CD−RW discs may be damagedby direct exposure to sunlight, hightemperatures or other storage condi-tions. The unit may be unable to playsome damaged discs.

� If you insert a CD−RW disc into theMP3/WMA player, playback will beginmore slowly than with a conventionalCD or CD−R disc.

� Recordings on CD−R/CD−RW cannotbe played using the DDCD (DoubleDensity CD) system.

TERMS

Packet write—

This is a general term that describes theprocess of writing data on−demand toCD−R, etc., in the same way that data iswritten to floppy or hard discs.

ID3 Tag—

This is a method of embedding track−re-lated information in an MP3 file. This em-bedded information can include the tracktitle, the artist’s name, the album title, themusic genre, the year of production, com-ments and other data. The contents canbe freely edited using software with ID3tag editing functions. Although the tagsare restricted to the number of characters,the information can be viewed when thetrack is played back.

WMA Tag—

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that isused in the same way as an ID3 tag.WMA tags carry information such as tracktitle, artist name.

ISO 9660 format—

This is the international standard for theformatting of CD−ROM folders and files.For the ISO 9660 format, there are twolevels of regulations.

Level 1:

The file name is in 8.3 format (8 charac-ter file names, with a 3 character fileextension. File names must be composedof one−byte capital letters and numbers.The “_” symbol may also be included.)

Level 2:

The file name can have up to 31 charac-ters (including the separation mark “.” andfile extension). Each folder must containfewer than 8 hierarchies.

m3u—

Playlists created using “WINAMP” softwarehave a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3—

MP3 is an audio compression standarddetermined by a working group (MPEG) ofthe ISO (International Standard Organiza-tion). MP3 compresses audio data toabout 1/10 the size of that on convention-al discs.

285

WMA—

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audiocompression format developed by Micro-soft. It compresses files into a size small-er than that of MP3 files. The decodingformats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8, and9.

287

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAir conditioning systemControls 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climate remote control 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel ventss 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning filter 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 9

288

1. Passenger compartment temperaturedisplay

2. Outside temperature display

3. Temperature control switches

4. Air flow control switches

5. Fan speed control switches

6. Automatic control switch

7. Air intake control switch

8. Rear window and outside rear viewmirror defogger switch (See page 118for details.)

9. Windshield air flow switch

10. Air conditioning on−off switch

11. Air conditioning operation screen dis-play button

12. “OFF” switch

In this manual, English version screensare shown as an example.

Controls

�Type 1

27p165a

289











11. “OFF” switch



�Type 2

27p164a

290






6. “OFF” switch








�Type 3

27p337

291

The automatic air conditioning automat-ically maintains the set temperature.

This air conditioning features automaticfan speed and air flow control which auto-matically selects the most suitable fanspeed and air flow to control the tempera-ture. The hybrid system must be in the“IG−ON” mode.

CLIMATE: Push this button to displayswitches for automatic air conditioningcontrols.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the air condi-tioning on longer than necessarywhen the hybrid system is not operat-ing.

27p005a

Air flow selection : In the beginning of the automatic air flow mode, air might be delivered.

292

27p156

Type 1 and Type 2

27p111a

Type 3

SETTING OPERATION—automatic con-trol

1. Touch the “AUTO” switch.

The indicator located in the instrumentcluster will come on.

Air conditioning is turned on if not oper-ated.

Air flow quantity, switching of the diffus-ers, and switching of the air intake be-tween RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDEAIR are automatically adjusted. The opera-tion status is shown by each indicator.

However, if the RECIRCULATED AIRmode is selected manually, controlchanges to give priority to manual set-tings.

When one of the manual control buttonsis depressed while operating in automaticmode, the mode relevant to the depressedbutton is set. Other conditions continue tobe adjusted automatically. However, oper-ating the air flow outlets or fan speed willturn off the automatic control.

Touch the “OFF” switch to turn the airconditioning off.

(a) Climate control

293

27p157

Type 1 and Type 2

27p112a

Type 3

2. Use the “TEMP” switch to set thedesired temperature.

The temperature of air delivered to thepassenger compartment will be controlledautomatically according to the setting.

SETTING OPERATION—manual control

When one of the manual controlswitches is touched while operating inautomatic mode, the mode relevant tothe touched switch is set. Other condi-tions continue to be adjusted automati-cally.

294

If manual air flow selection is desired—

27p158

Type 1 and Type 2

27p113a

Type 3

The outlets from which air is deliveredcan be selected manually by touching theswitch. The function of each mode is asfollows:

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from theinstrument panel vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

The selected mode is highlighted in green.

If quick heating or cooling is desired—

27p157

Type 1 and Type 2

27p112a

Type 3

295

Touch the “TEMP” switches and hold ei-ther one until the maximum figure or mini-mum figure appears.

If manual fan speed control is desired—

27p159

Type 1 and Type 2

27p114a

Type 3

1. Fan speed at low2. Fan speed at high

The fan speed can be set to your desiredspeed by touching the appropriate air flowcontrol switch. The higher the fan speedis, the more air is delivered. Touching the“OFF” switch turns off the fan.

To remove exterior windshield frost, use thehigh speed setting.

The selected mode is highlighted in green.

296

If manual switching of air intake is de-sired—

27p160a

Type 1 and Type 2

27p115a

Type 3

The air intake control switch is used toswitch the air intake between the OUT-SIDE AIR mode and RECIRCULATED AIRmode.

With the switch in the OUTSIDE AIRmode, the system will take fresh outsideair into the vehicle.

If quick circulation of cooled air is de-sired, touch the air intake control switchfor RECIRCULATED AIR.

The indicator will come on in the instru-ment cluster while the RECIRCULATEDAIR mode is selected.

If recirculated air is used during heating,the windows will fog up more easily.

If the hybrid system is turned off in theOUTSIDE AIR mode, the automatic controlof the air intake is activated when thehybrid system is turned on again.

2−way air intake control

To improve fuel economy, OUTSIDE AIRmode control changes when the air in-take selector is set in OUTSIDE AIR onthe following conditions:

� When the maximum heating is neededwith the air flow in “Floor” or “Floor/Windshield”, fresh air flows in the up-per compartment, while air is recircu-lated in the lower compartment.

� When cooling is needed, both freshand recirculate modes turns on.

297

If manual on−off of the air conditioningis desired—

Touch the “A/C” switch to turn the airconditioning on and touch it again to turnthe air conditioning off.

If the system is used for ventilation, heat-ing in dry weather or removing frost orexterior fog on the windshield, turn the airconditioning off once it is no longer re-quired. This will improve fuel economy.The air conditioning can be used for year−round automatic temperature control in-cluding cooling and dehumidifying opera-tion.

27p161

Type 1 and Type 2

27p116a

Type 3

To remove interior fog on the wind-shield—

Touch the windshield air flow switch.

To remove frost or exterior fog on thewindshield—

1. Touch the upper side of the tempera-ture control switch until maximum fig-ure appears on the temperature dis-play.

2. Touch the windshield air flow switch.

3. Push the “HI” of the air flow controlswitch to obtain a maximum air flow.

4. Leave the air conditioning on−off buttonoff.

When the windshield air flow switch istouched, the air conditioning is set to op-erate and the OUTSIDE AIR mode is set.

If you touch the windshield air flow switchonce again while in the windshield air flowmode, the mode then returns to the lastmode used.

The indicator will come on in the instru-ment cluster while the windshield air flowmode is on.

(b) Windshield defogging anddefrosting

298

CAUTION

Do not use the windshield air flowswitch during cooled air operation inextremely humid weather. The differ-ence between the temperature of theoutside air and that of the windshieldcould cause the outer surface of thewindshield to fog up blocking yourvision.

27p126

� The light sensor is located on the driv-er’s side edge of the instrument panel.If you put anything on this area orcover the area, the sensor functionmay be adversely affected.

� To cool off your Toyota after it hasbeen parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

� Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

� Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

� On cold days, set the fan speed tohigh for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

� When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toOUTSIDE AIR and the fan speed se-lector to any setting except “OFF”.

� If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

(c) Operating tips

299

27p104

The switches are installed on both sidesof the steering pad.

“A/C AUTO” switch: Use this switch toturn on the automatic mode. (For details,see page 292.) Pressing this switch in theautomatic control turns the blower off.

“ TEMP ” switch: Use this switch toset the desired temperature. (For details,see page 293.)

“ ” switch: Use this switch to changethe air intake mode. (For details, seepage 296.)

“ ” switch: Use this switch to remove

interior fog on the windshield. (For details,see page 297.)

“ ” switch: Use this switch to turn onor off the rear window and outside rearview mirror defoggers. (For details, seepage 118.)

CAUTION

Operate the switches with due carewhile you are driving to avoid acci-dents.

27p006a

If air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents. The instrumentpanel vents may be opened or closed asshown.

Climate remote control (steering switches) Instrument panel vents

300

82p109

The air conditioning filter informationlabel is placed on the left side of theglove box as shown and indicates thata filter has been installed.

The air conditioning filter prevents dustfrom entering the vehicle through the airconditioning vent.

82p006b

The air conditioning filter is set behindthe glove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af-ter long use. The filter may need to bereplaced if the air flow of the air condi-tioning and heater experiences extremereductions in operating efficiency, or ifthe windows begin to fog up easily.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,inspect and replace the air conditioningfilter according to the maintenance sched-ule. In dusty areas or areas with heavytraffic flow, such as inner city or desertareas, early replacement may be required.(For scheduled maintenance information,please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Sup-plement/Scheduled Maintenance”.)

Air conditioning filter——Checking and replacing theair conditioning filter

301

82p007a

1. Open the glove box, and slide offthe damper as shown.

82p107

2. Push in each side of the glove boxto disconnect the claws.

82p008c

3. Pull the filter case toward you totake it out.

302

82p009b

4. Remove the filter from the filter caseand replace it with a new one.

5. Install the filter and filter case in thereverse order of removal.

When setting the filter to the filter case,ensure that the flat side of the filter isdown and the ribbed side is up.

Position the filter case so that the “�UP”mark is pointing up and install it in thevehicle.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop-erly in position. The use of air condi-tioning with the air filter removedmay cause deteriorated dustproof per-formance and then affect air condi-tioning performance.

303

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOther equipmentClock 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear view monitor system 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlets 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear console box 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove boxes 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary boxes 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holders 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottle holders 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie−down hooks 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage storage box 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage cover 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 10

304

Clock

28p009d

The digital clock indicates the time.

The hybrid system must be in “ACC” or“IG−ON”.

To set the hour: Push the “H” button. To set the minutes: Push the “M” button.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the clock, the time dis-play will automatically be set to 1:00.

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the time indi-cator will be reduced.

The rear view monitor system assiststhe driver by displaying an image ofthe view behind the vehicle while back-ing up. The image is displayed in re-verse on the screen. This allows theimage to appear in the same manner asthat of the rear view mirror.

To display the rear view image on thescreen, place the selector lever in the“R” position when the “IG−ON” mode isenabled.

If you move the selector lever out of the“R” position, the screen returns to theprevious screen. Operating another func-tion of the navigation system will displayanother screen.

The rear view monitor system is a supple-ment device intended to assist back up.When backing up, be sure to check be-hind and all around the vehicle visually.

CAUTION

� Never depend on the rear viewmonitor system entirely when back-ing up. Always make sure your in-tended path is clear.

Use caution just as you would whenbacking up any vehicle.

� Never back up while looking only atthe screen. The image on thescreen is different from actual con-ditions. Depicted distances betweenobjects and flat surfaces will differfrom actual distances. If you backup while looking only at the screen,you may hit a vehicle, a person oran object. When backing up, besure to check behind and all aroundthe vehicle visually and with mir-rors before proceeding.

� Do not use the system when theback door is not completely closed.

Rear view monitor system

305

� If the back of the vehicle is hit, theposition and mounting angle of thecamera may change. Be sure tohave the camera’s position andmounting angle checked at yourToyota dealer.

� If the temperature changes rapidly,such as when hot water is pouredon the vehicle in cold weather, thesystem may not operate normally.

� If the camera lens becomes dirty, itcannot transmit a clear image. Ifwater droplets, snow, or mud ad-heres to the lens, rinse with waterand wipe with a soft cloth. If thelens is extremely dirty, wash it witha mild cleanser and rinse.

� Use your own eyes to confirm thevehicle’s surroundings, as the dis-played image may become faint ordark, and moving images will bedistorted, or not entirely visiblewhen the outside temperature islow. When backing up, be sure tocheck behind and all around the ve-hicle visually and with mirror beforeproceeding.

When replacing the tires, please consultyour Toyota dealer. If you replace thetires, the area displayed on the screenmay change.

28P134

On screen

Corners of bumper

Check surroundings for safety.

306

AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN

Image is displayed approximately levelon screen.

� The area detected by the camera islimited. Objects which are close toeither corner of the bumper or underthe bumper cannot be seen on thescreen.

� The area displayed on the screenmay vary according to vehicle orien-tation or road conditions.

28P135

THE REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEMCAMERA

The rear view monitor system camera islocated on the back door as shown in theillustration. The camera uses a speciallens. The distance of the image that ap-pears on the screen differs from the actu-al distance.

In the following cases, it may becomedifficult to see the images on the screen,even when the system is functioning.

� In the dark (for example, at night)

� When the temperature near the lens isextremely high or low

� When water droplets are adhering tothe camera, or when humidity is high(for example, when it rains)

� When foreign matter (for example,snow or mud) adheres to the cameralens

� When the sun or the beam of head-lights is shining directly into the cam-era lens

307

Check surroundings for safety.

If a bright light (for example, sunlight re-flected off the vehicle body) is picked upby the camera, the smear effect* peculiarto the camera may occur.

*: Smear effect—A phenomenon that oc-curs when a bright light (for example, sun-light reflected off the vehicle body) ispicked up by the camera; when trans-mitted by the camera, the light sourceappears to have a vertical streak aboveand below it.

Power outlets

28p010a

Instrument panel

28p107

Rear console box

The power outlets are designed forpower supply for car accessories.

The hybrid system must be in “ACC” or“IG−ON” for the power outlets to be used.

NOTICE

� To prevent the fuse from beingblown, do not use the electricityover the total vehicle capacity of12V/120W.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlet longer than necessary whenthe hybrid system is not operating.

� Close the power outlet lid when thepower outlet is not in use. Insertinganything other than an appropriateplug that fits the outlet, or allowingany liquid to get into the outletmay cause electrical failure or shortcircuits.

308

Rear console box

To use the rear console box, open asshown in the illustration.

CAUTION

When opening the rear console box,take due care not to catch your fin-gers.

28p002a

Upper glove box

28p105

Lower glove box

To open the glove boxes, push eachbutton.

The inside of the upper glove box is sepa-rated by the partition. When storing a lon-ger object, remove the partition.

With the instrument panel lights on, thelower glove box light will come on whenthe lower glove box is open.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorsclosed while driving.

Glove boxes

309

28p128

Indicator light

Buttons

The garage door opener (HomeLink�

Universal Transceiver) is manufacturedunder license from HomeLink� and canbe programmed to operate garagedoors, gates, entry doors, door locks,home lighting systems, and securitysystems, etc.

(a) Programing the HomeLink�

The HomeLink� in your vehicle has 3buttons and you can store one programfor each button.

To ensure correct programing into theHomeLink�, install a new battery in thehand−held transmitter prior to program-ming.

The battery side of the hand−held trans-mitter must be pointed away from theHomeLink� during the programming pro-cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedurein “Programming an entrance gate/Pro-gramming all devices in the Canadianmarket”.

When the programming the HomeLink� forthe first time, erase the HomeLink�

memory once before following the stepsbelow to program the HomeLink�. (See“(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink�

memory” on page 312. When carrying out(c), do not hold the buttons for longerthan 30 seconds.)

When registering the second and third sig-nals, simply follow the steps listed below.If you erase the HomeLink� memoryagain, any signals registered previouslywill be erased.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink� buttonsyou want to program.

Garage door opener

310

28p130aHomeLink� 25 to 75 mm

(1 to 3 in.)

Hand−heldgarage transmitter

2. Place your hand−held garage transmit-ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away fromthe surface of the HomeLink�.

Keep the red indicator light on theHomeLink� in view while programming.

28p131

3. Simultaneously press and hold thehand−held garage transmitter buttonalong with the selected HomeLink� but-ton.

Do not release the buttons until step 4has been completed.

4. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash, you can release both but-tons.

28p132

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.If programming a garage door opener,check to see if the garage door opensand closes.

If the garage door does not operate, iden-tify if your garage transmitter is of the“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink� button. The ga-rage door has the rolling code feature ifthe indicator light (on the HomeLink�)flashes rapidly and then remains lit after2 seconds. If your garage transmitter isthe “Rolling Code” type, proceed to theheading “Programming a rolling code sys-tem”.

311

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is “Rolling Code”equipped, it is necessary to followsteps 1 through 4 under the heading“Programming the HomeLink�” beforeproceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.The exact location and color of thebutton may vary by brand of garagedoor opener. Refer to the owner’sguide supplied by the garage dooropener manufacturer for the location ofthis “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 secondsin which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-grammed HomeLink� button twice. Thegarage door may open. If the doordoes open, the programming process iscomplete. If the door does not open,press and release the button a thirdtime. This third press and release willcomplete the programming process byopening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door openermotor should now recognize theHomeLink� unit and be able activate thegarage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 each remain-ing HomeLink� button to programanother rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/Program-ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink� but-tons you want to program.

2. Place your hand−held gate/devicetransmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)away from the surface of theHomeLink�.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink�

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selectedHomeLink� button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)the hand−held gate/device transmitterbutton every two seconds until step 5is complete.

5. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash, you can release both but-tons.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.Check to see if the gate/device oper-ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as homesecurity systems, home door locks orlighting, contact your authorized Toyotadealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink� buttons cannot beerased, however, to reprogram a singlebutton, follow the procedure “Programmingthe HomeLink�”.

(b) Operating the HomeLink�

To operate the HomeLink�, press the ap-propriate HomeLink� button to activate theprogrammed device. The HomeLink� indi-cator light should come on. TheHomeLink� continues to send the signalfor up to 20 seconds as long as the but-ton is pressed.

312

28p133

(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink�

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codesat one time, press and hold down the 2outside buttons for 20 seconds until theindicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erasethe programs stored in the HomeLink�

memory.

For additional programming assistancewith your HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver call the:

� Toyota Customer Experience Center at1−800−331−4331 (U.S.A.)

� Toyota Canada Customer InteractionCentre at 1−888−869−6828 (Canada)

Refer to HomeLink� on the internet at:

WWW.HOMELINK.COM

CAUTION

� When programming the HomeLink�

Universal Transceiver, you may beoperating a garage door or otherdevice. Make sure people and ob-jects are out of the way of the ga-rage door or other device to pre-vent potential harm or damage.

� Do not use this HomeLink� Univer-sal Transceiver with any garagedoor opener that lacks the safetystop and reverse feature as re-quired by federal safety standards.(This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.) A garage door open-er which cannot detect an object(signaling the door to stop and re-verse), does not meet current feder-al safety standards. Using a garagedoor opener without these featuresincreases risk of serious injury ordeath.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the ICRules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has beentested and complies with FCC and ICRules. Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate thedevice.

313

To use the box, open the lid as shownin the following illustrations.

CAUTION

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the auxiliary boxclosed while driving.

� Auxiliary box on the ceiling—As this box is designed for holdinga light object such as an eyeglass,do not place any heavy objects init. Heavy objects may cause theholder to open and contents to flyout resulting in injuries.

NOTICE

Auxiliary box on the ceiling—In hot weather, inside of the vehicleceiling becomes very hot. Do notleave anything flammable or deform-able such as a lighter, the glasses,etc. inside.

28p117

Front ceiling

28p011c

Front side of the console box

28p003a

On the instrument panel

28p111a

Left side of the luggage compartment

Auxiliary boxes

314

28p005b

For front seats

28p006b

For rear seats

The cup holder is designed for holdingcups or drink−cans securely.

To use the cup holder, open the lid.

CAUTION

� Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink−cans on the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about in the compartmentand possibly injure people in thevehicle during sudden braking or inan accident.

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop while driving, keep the cupholder closed when not in use.

� Take due care not to catch yourfingers when the cup holder isopened.

28p109

The bottle holders are designed to holdbottles securely.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the holder forany other purpose for which it wasintended. Inappropriately sized orshaped objects may be thrown aboutin the compartment and possibly in-jure people in the vehicle during asudden braking or an accident.

Cup holders Bottle holders

315

NOTICE

Do not put a cup or open bottle inthe bottle holder because the con-tents may spill when the door opensor closes.

22p120

To secure your luggage, use the tie−down hooks as shown above.

See “—Stowing precautions” on page 344for precautions when loading luggage.

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie−down hooks retracted when not inuse.

28p112a

1. To open the luggage storage box, turnthe knob to the “UNLOCK” position andopen the lid.

Tie−down hooks Luggage storage box

316

28p113a

2. Hold the lid open by inserting the sup-port rod into the slot.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,keep the luggage storage box closedand locked while driving.

28p114

To use the luggage cover, pull it out ofthe retractor and hook it on the an-chors.

CAUTION

Do not place anything on the luggagecover. Such items may be thrownaway and possibly injure people inthe vehicle during sudden braking ora collision.

28p115

To remove the luggage cover, lift it up.

Luggage cover

317

28p116a

You can stow the luggage cover in theluggage storage box in the luggagecompartment as shown in the illustration.At that time, adjust the cover so that“TOP” is facing up.

After removing the luggage cover, stow itin the luggage storage box or place itsomewhere other than the passengercompartment. This will prevent passengersfrom being injured in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

28p125

To replace the luggage cover, adjust thecover so that “TOP” is facing upwards.

28p007b

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the vehicle carpet and floor mat have2 holes, then they are designed for usewith locking clips. Attach the floor mat tothe vehicle carpet using the clips. Lockthe clips into the holes in the vehiclecarpet.

Floor mat

318

28p008b

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properlyplaced on the vehicle carpet. If thefloor mat slips and interferes with themovement of the pedals during driv-ing, it may cause an accident.

319

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOURTOYOTAInformation before driving your ToyotaBreak−in period 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut−off system 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three−way catalytic converters 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant heat storage system 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iridium−tipped spark plugs 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 327. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric power steering system 331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyota’s identification 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire information 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle load limits 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo and luggage 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3

320

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak−in. But following a few simple tipsfor the first 1000 km (600 miles) can addto the future economy and long life ofyour vehicle:

� Avoid full−throttle acceleration whenstarting and driving.

� Avoid racing the hybrid engine.

� Try to avoid hard stops during the first300 km (200 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your vehicle must use only unleadedgasoline.

To help prevent gas station mixups, yourToyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.The special nozzle on pumps with un-leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas willnot.

At a minimum, the gasoline you useshould meet the specifications of ASTMD4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use ofleaded gasoline will cause the three−way catalytic converter to lose its ef-fectiveness and the emission controlsystem to function improperly. Also,this can increase maintenance costs.

OCTANE RATING

Select unleaded gasoline with an Oc-tane Rating of 87 (Research OctaneNumber 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded fuel with an octane ratinglower than 87 may result in engine knock-ing. Persistent knocking can lead to en-gine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even whenusing the recommended fuel, or if youhear steady knocking while holding asteady speed on level roads, consult yourToyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may noticelight knocking for a short time while accel-erating or driving up hills. This is normaland there is no need for concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENTADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasolinethat contains detergent additives toavoid build−up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.contains detergent additives to keep cleanand/or clean intake systems.

Break−in period Fuel

321

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,Europe and Japan have developed aspecification for quality fuel namedWorld−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) thatis expected to be applied world wide.The WWFC consists of four categoriesthat depend on required emission le-vels. In the U.S., category 4 has beenadopted. The WWFC improves air quali-ty by providing for better emissions invehicle fleets, and customer satisfactionthrough better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-formulated gasoline that contains oxy-genates such as ethanol or MTBE isavailable in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleanerburning gasoline and appropriately blendedreformulated gasoline. These types of gas-oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenateblended gasoline where the oxygenatecontent is up to 10% ethanol or 15%MTBE. If you use gasohol in yourToyota, be sure that it has an octanerating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-taining MMT is used, your emission con-trol system may be adversely affected.The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-strument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experiencedriveability problems caused by the partic-ular gasoline that you are using. If youcontinue to have unacceptable driveability,try changing gasoline brands. If this doesnot rectify your problem, then consult yourToyota dealer.

NOTICE

� Do not use gasohol other thanstated above. It will cause fuel sys-tem damage or vehicle performanceproblems.

� If drivability problems are encoun-tered (poor hot starting, vaporizing,engine knock, etc.), discontinue itsuse.

� Take care not to spill gasohol dur-ing refueling. Gasohol may causepaint damage.

322

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

45 L (11.9 gal., 9.9 lmp.gal.)

The given fuel tank capacity is measuredon EPA/CARB ORVR testing conditionwhich is approved for nominal capacitymeasurement condition.

The fuel tank capacity is decreased at lowambient temperature. (decreased by about5 L (1.3 gal., 1.1 lmp.gal.) at −10�C(14�F).)

Fuel pump shut−off systemThe fuel pump shut−off system stops sup-plying fuel to the engine to minimize therisk of fuel leakage when the engine stallsor an airbag inflates upon collision. Torestart the hybrid system after the fuelpump shut−off system activates, press the“POWER” switch to the “OFF” mode andstart it.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehiclebefore restarting the hybrid system. Ifyou find that fuel has leaked onto theground, the fuel system has beendamaged and is in need of repair. Inthis case, do not restart the hybridsystem.

If you plan to drive your Toyota inanother country...

First, comply with the vehicle registrationlaws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octanenumber).

Operation in foreign countries

323

30p001d

The three−way catalytic converters areemission control devices installed inthe exhaust system.

Its purpose is to reduce pollutants in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

� Keep people and combustible mate-rials away from the exhaust pipewhile the engine is running. Theexhaust gas is very hot.

� Do not drive, idle or park your ve-hicle over anything that might burneasily such as grass, leaves, paperor rags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gasesflowing into the three−way catalyticconverter may cause it to overheatand create a fire hazard. To preventthis and other damage, observe thefollowing precautions:

� Use only unleaded gasoline.

� Do not drive with an extremely lowfuel level; running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, creat-ing an excessive load on the three−way catalytic converter.

� Do not turn off the ignition whilethe vehicle is moving.

� Keep your engine in good runningorder. Malfunctions in the engineelectrical system, electronic ignitionsystem/distributor ignition systemor fuel system could cause an ex-tremely high temperature.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, take yourvehicle in for a check−up as soonas possible. Remember, your Toyotadealer knows your vehicle and itsthree−way catalytic converter sys-tem best.

� To ensure that the three−way cata-lytic converter and the entire emis-sion control system operate proper-ly, your vehicle must receive theperiodic inspections required by theToyota Maintenance Schedule. Forscheduled maintenance information,refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.

Three−way catalytic converters

324

CAUTION

� Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.It contains carbon monoxide, whichis a colorless and odorless gas. Itcan cause unconsciousness or evendeath.

� Make sure the exhaust system hasno holes or loose connections. Thesystem should be checked fromtime to time. If you hit something,or notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust, have the systemchecked immediately.

� Do not run the hybrid system in agarage or enclosed area except forthe time needed to drive the vehiclein or out. The exhaust gases cannotescape, making this a particularlydangerous situation.

� Do not remain for a long time in aparked vehicle with the hybrid sys-tem running. If it is unavoidable,however, do so only in an uncon-fined area and adjust the heating orcooling system to force outside airinto the vehicle.

� Keep the back door closed whiledriving. An open or unsealed backdoor may cause exhaust gases tobe drawn into the vehicle.

� To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe inlet grilles in front of the wind-shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-er obstructions.

� If you smell exhaust fumes in thevehicle, open the windows andclose the back door to ensureplenty of fresh air enters the ve-hicle. If you can smell exhaustfumes even though there are noother vehicles in the surroundingarea, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer. Continued in-halation of exhaust fumes can leadto death by gas poisoning.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions oflubricating and cooling the inside of theengine, and plays a major role in main-taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-sume some engine oil during normalengine operation. The causes of oilconsumption in a normal engine are asfollows.

� Oil is used to lubricate pistons, pistonrings and cylinders. A thin film of oilis left on the cylinder wall when apiston moves downwards in the cylin-der. High negative pressure generatedwhen the vehicle is decelerating suckssome of this oil into the combustionchamber. This oil as well as some partof the oil film left on the cylinder wallis burned by the high temperature com-bustion gases during the combustionprocess.

Engine exhaust cautionsFacts about engine oil consumption

325

� Oil is also used to lubricate the stemsof the intake valves. Some of this oilis sucked into the combustion chambertogether with the intake air and isburned along with the fuel. High tem-perature exhaust gases also burn theoil used to lubricate the exhaust valvestems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-pends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-ing and frequent acceleration and decel-eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, sinceits pistons, piston rings and cylinder wallshave not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp.qt./600miles)

When judging the amount of oil con-sumption, note that the oil may becomediluted and make it difficult to judgethe true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more. Thisis because the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate outwhen the vehicle is then driven at highspeeds, as on an expressway, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVELCHECK

One of the most important points in prop-er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-gine oil at the optimum level so that oilfunction will not be impaired. Therefore, itis essential that the oil level be checkedregularly. Toyota recommends that the oillevel be checked every time you refuelthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,see “Checking the engine oil level” onpage 404.

326

30p103

Electric water pump Coolant heat storagetank

Coolant flow controlvalve

The coolant heat storage tank systemstores hot coolant and feeds it via theelectric water pump automatically to warmthe engine as required. This system helpsgenerate clean emissions. To confirm thecoolant heat storage system check, thepump may operate automatically with thevehicle stopped (in the “OFF” mode).

Although the pump may operate andcause noise while the vehicle is stopped,this does not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

� The coolant in this tank is hot evenif the engine and radiator are cold.

� For replacement of the coolant,contact your Toyota dealer.

� Do not touch bolts (9 pieces)painted in yellow.

� In case the bolts are loosened,there is a risk of hot coolant com-ing out from inside the tank.

� When this has any malfunction, thesurface of this tank gets hot. Toprevent burning yourself, do nottouch the tank.

INFORMATION

� In such cases as the time of enginestarting and a short trip after theengine is stopped, the electric waterpump will work for a moment, butthis is no problem.

� This is for the preparation for goodemission.

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tippedspark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs.Do not adjust gaps for engine perfor-mance or smooth drivability.

Coolant heat storage system Iridium−tipped spark plugs

327

REGENERATIVE BRAKE

When the brake is applied, the electricmotor used as a generator converts kinet-ic energy into electric energy.

The regenerative brake works in the fol-lowing operations.

1. When the accelerator pedal is re-leased, the reduced speed equal to en-gine braking in a gasoline−fueled ve-hicle is obtained in accordance with therunning mode position of the shift le-ver.

2. When the brake pedal is depressedwith the shift lever in “D” or “B”, theregenerative brake works.

HYDRAULIC BRAKE

This brake system has 3 independent hy-draulic circuits. If either circuit should fail,the other will still work. However, the ped-al will be harder to press, and your stop-ping distance will increase. Also, thebrake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only asingle brake system. Have yourbrakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE ACTUATOR

The brake actuator uses brake fluid pres-surized by the pump to power−assist thebrakes. If the brake actuator fails duringdriving, the brake system warning lightcomes on and buzzer sounds continuous-ly. In this case, the brakes may not workproperly. If they do not work well, depressthe brake pedal firmly. If the brake systemwarning light comes on, immediately stopyour vehicle and contact your Toyota deal-er.

The red and yellow brake system warninglight may stay on for about 60 secondsafter the “IG−ON” mode is enabled. It isnormal if the light turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the red and yellow brakesystem warning light and buzzer. It is nor-mal if the light turns off and the buzzerstops sounding after a few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the enginecompartment after the hybrid system isstarted or the brake pedal is depressedrepeatedly. This is a pump pulsatingsound of the brake system, and it is nota malfunction.

In the following conditions, you may heara motor sound in the engine compartment.

� The brake pedal is depressed when thehybrid system is turned off.

� The driver’s door is opened.

� For a few seconds after the hybridsystem is “OFF” and about 90 secondshave passed.

The brake pedal stroke may be shortwhen you press the “POWER” switch withthe brake pedal depressed.

Brake system

328

CAUTION

� Do not pump the brake pedal if thehybrid system is not operating.Each push on the pedal uses upyour reserved brake fluid pressure.

� Even if the power assist is com-pletely lost, the brakes will stillwork. But you will have to push thepedal hard, much harder than nor-mal. And your braking distance willincrease.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

The anti−lock brake system is designedto automatically help prevent lock−up ofthe wheels during a sudden braking orbraking on slippery road surfaces. Thisassists in providing directional stabilityand steering performance of the vehicleunder these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brakepedal: When the anti−lock brake systemfunction is in action, the slip indicator inthe instrument cluster flashes and youwill hear a noise. In this situation, to letthe anti−lock brake system work for you,just hold the brake pedal down morefirmly. Do not pump the brake in a panicstop. This will result in reduced brakingperformance.

The anti−lock brake system becomes op-erative after the vehicle has acceleratedto a speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slipperyroad surfaces such as on a manhole cov-er, a steel plate at a construction site,joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy daytends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-tem.

When the anti−lock brake system is ac-tivated, the following condition may oc-cur. They do not indicate a malfunctionof the system:

� You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-tem operating and the vibrations of thevehicle body and steering wheel. Youmay also hear the motor sound in theengine compartment even after the ve-hicle is stopped.

329

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti−lockbrake system: Although the anti−lockbrake system assists in providing ve-hicle control, it is still important todrive with all due care and maintaina moderate speed and safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you, be-cause there are limits to the vehiclestability and effectiveness of steeringwheel operation even with the anti−lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds itscapability, or if hydroplaning occursduring high speed driving in the rain,the anti−lock brake system does notprovide vehicle control.

Anti−lock brake system is not de-signed to shorten the stopping dis-tance: Always drive at a moderatespeed and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you.Compared with vehicles without ananti−lock brake system, your vehiclemay require a longer stopping dis-tance in the following cases:

� Driving on rough, gravel or snow−covered roads.

� Driving with tire chains installed.

� Driving over the steps such as thejoints on the road.

� Driving on roads where the roadsurface is pitted or has other differ-ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size atappropriate pressure: The anti−lockbrake system detects vehicle speedsusing the speed sensors for respec-tive wheels’ turning speeds. The useof tires other than specified may failto detect the accurate turning speed,resulting in a longer stopping dis-tance.

30p002b

Vehicle sold in the U.S.A.

30p007b

Vehicle sold in Canada

330

“ABS” warning light

The light comes on when the “IG−ON”mode is enabled. If the anti−lock brakesystem works properly, the light turnsoff after the “READY” light comes on.Thereafter, if the system malfunctions,the light comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is on), theanti−lock brake system does not operate,but the brake system still operates con-ventionally.

If any of the following conditions oc-curs, this indicates a malfunction some-where in the components monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when the“IG−ON” mode is enabled, or the“READY” light remains on.

� The light comes on while you are driv-ing.

A warning light turning on briefly duringoperation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the red brake systemwarning light, immediately stop yourvehicle at a safe place and contactyour Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system function and brake as-sist function will fail but also the ve-hicle will become extremely unstableduring braking.

Any of the following conditions may oc-cur, but does not indicate a malfunc-tion:

� The light may stay on for about 60seconds after the “IG−ON” mode is en-abled. It is normal if it turns off aftera while.

� Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the light. It is normal ifit turns off after a few seconds.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

When you slam the brakes on, thebrake assist system judges as an emer-gency stop and provides more powerfulbraking for a driver who cannot holddown the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-erful braking will be applied. At this time,you may hear a sound in the enginecompartment. This does not indicate amalfunction.

The brake assist system becomes opera-tive after the vehicle has accelerated toa speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this system’s warn-ing light, see “Service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers” on page 125.

331

The electric power steering system, us-ing an electric motor, assists the turn-ing of the steering wheel.

In the following cases, you may feel thesteering becomes heavy. However, theelectric power steering system warninglight does not come on. (Because it isnot a malfunction.)

� When maneuvering the steering fre-quently or keeping the steering wheelturned fully while the vehicle is stoppedor moving very slowly

The power steering effect will be re-duced to prevent the system from over-heating. Avoid turning the steeringwheel, or stop the vehicle. When youleave the vehicle in the “IG−ON” modefor a while, the system will becomecool.

NOTICE

If you repeat the operation which willturn on the overheating preventionfunction, the electric power steeringsystem may be damaged.

� When the 12 volt battery is discharged

Check the 12 volt battery’s condition.If necessary, recharge or replace thebattery. For details, see “Checking 12volt battery condition” on page 418.

� When the steering wheel is operatedwith the hybrid system not to be turnedon (with the “READY” light off)

The 12 volt battery capacity is de-creased temporarily. The system re-turns to normal some time after thehybrid system is turned on.

If there is a problem somewhere in theelectric power steering system, the warn-ing light comes on in the multi−informationdisplay. For details, see “Multi−informationdisplay” on page 133.

When you move the steering wheel, anelectrical motor noise may be heard. Thisis power steering motor noise, and is nota malfunction.

30p003

The brake pad wear limit indicators onyour disc brakes give a warning noisewhen the brake pads are worn to wherereplacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noisewhile driving, have the brake padschecked and replaced by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-tor damage can result if the pads are notreplaced when necessary.

Electric power steering systemBrake pad wear limitindicators

332

30p004b

The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the legal identifier for your vehicle.This number is on the left top of theinstrument panel, and can be seenthrough the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification numberfor your Toyota. It is used in registeringthe ownership of your vehicle.

30p005c

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isalso on the Certification Label.

30p006b

Engine number

Motor number

The engine and motor number platesare installed on the engine and trans-axle case as shown.

Your Toyota’s identification——Vehicle identification number —Engine and motor number

333

Theft prevention labelsYour new vehicle carries theft preven-tion labels which are approximately 47mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reducethe incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-ing the tracing and recovery of parts fromstolen vehicles. The label is designed sothat once it is applied to a surface, anyattempt to remove it will result in destroy-ing the integrity of the label. Transferringthese labels intact from one part to anoth-er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove thetheft prevention labels as it may vio-late certain state or federal laws.

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassiswith lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. Itcan cause dangerous handling charac-teristics, resulting in loss of control.

Suspension and chassis

334

This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. Tire size—For details, see “Tire

size” on page 338.2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)—For details, see“DOT and Tire Identification Num-ber (TIN)” on page 337.

3. Location of tread wear indica-tors—For details, see “Checkingand replacing tires” on page 411.

4. Tire ply composition and materi-als—Plies mean a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords. Cords meanthe strands forming the plies in thetire.

5. Summer tire or all seasontire—An all season tire has “M+S”on the sidewall. A tire not markedwith “M+S” is a summer tire. Fordetails, see “Types of tires” onpage 347.

Tire information——Tire symbols (Standard tire)

30p226a

335

6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. The tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not have atube inside the tire and air is direct-ly filled in the tire. A tube type tirehas a tube inside the tire and thetube maintains the air pressure.

8. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure—For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 411.

9. Maximum cold tire inflationpressure—This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For recommended cold tireinflation pressure, see “Tires” onpage 434.

10. Uniform tire quality grading—For details, see “Uniform tire quali-ty grading” that follows.

336

This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”—A

compact spare tire is identified bythe phrase “TEMPORARY USEONLY” molded into its sidewall.This tire is designed for temporaryemergency use only. For details,see “Compact spare tire” on page366.

2. Tire size—For details, see “Tiresize” on page 338.

3. DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)—For details, see“DOT and Tire Identification Num-ber (TIN)” on page 337.

4. Location of tread wear indica-tors—For details, see “Checkingand replacing tires” on page 411.

5. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure—For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 411.

—Tire symbols (Compact spare tire)

30p104a

337

6. Maximum cold tire inflationpressure—This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For recommended cold tireinflation pressure, see “Tires” onpage 434.

7. Tire ply composition and materi-als—Plies mean a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords. Cords meanthe strands forming the plies in thetire.

8. “TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not have atube inside the tire and air is direct-ly filled in the tire. A tube type tirehas a tube inside the tire and thetube maintains the air pressure.

9. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. The tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

21A009a

This illustration indicates typical DOTand Tire Identification Number (TIN).1. “DOT” symbol2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)3. Tire manufacturer ’s identification

mark4. Tire size code5. Manufacturer ’s optional tire type

code (3 or 4 letters)6. Manufacturing week7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that thetire conforms to applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)

338

30p227a

This illustration indicates typical tiresize.1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use)2. Section width (in millimeters)3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)5. Wheel diameter (in inches)6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

21A007a

1. Section width2. Tire height3. Wheel diameter

21A006a

1. Bead2. Sidewall3. Shoulder4. Tread5. Belt6. Inner liner7. Reinforcing rubber8. Carcass9. Rim lines

10. Bead wires11. Chafer

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire

339

—Uniform tire quality gradingThis information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issuedby the National Highway Traffic Safe-ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation. It providesthe purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-formation on uniform tire quality grad-ing.Your Toyota dealer will help answerany questions you may have as youread this information.DOT quality grades—All passengercar tires must conform to FederalSafety Requirements in addition tothese grades. Quality grades canbe found where applicable on thetire sidewall between tread shoul-der and maximum section width.For example: Treadwear 200 Trac-tion AA Temperature A.

Tread wear—The tread wear gradeis a comparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when tested un-der controlled conditions on a speci-fied government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wearone and a half (1−1/2) times as wellon the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actualconditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving hab-its, service practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C, and they representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor trac-tion performance.Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based on braking(straight ahead) traction tests anddoes not include cornering (turning)traction.

340

Temperature A, B, C—The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C cor-responds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.Warning: The temperature grades forthis tire are established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either sep-arately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.

341

Tire related term Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressuretire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hoursor more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under thatcondition

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it isshown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced)of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, pow-er seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available asfactory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weightthe weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximumcapacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and addi-tional weight optional engine

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the sum of—(a) curb weight;(b) accessory weight;(c) vehicle capacity weight; and(d) production options weight

Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second columnof Table 1 that follows

—Glossary of tire terminology

342


Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not pre-viously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy dutybrakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

Vehicle capacity weight(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-nated seating capacity

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeperthan the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particularside that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table1 that follows

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beadsare seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer ’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

343


Vehicle normal load on the tirethe load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1– Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, numberof occupants

Vehicle normal load, number of occu-pants

Occupant distribution in a normallyloaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat

344

Vehicle load limits include total loadcapacity, seating capacity, towing ca-pacity and cargo capacity. Follow theload limits shown below. Total load ca-pacity and seating capacity are alsodescribed on the tire and loading in-formation label. For location of the tireand loading information label, see“Checking tire inflation pressure” onpage 409.Total load capacity:

365 kg (810 lb.)Total load capacity means combinedweight of occupants, cargo and lug-gage.Seating capacity:

Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)Seating capacity means the maximumnumber of occupants whose esti-mated average weight is 68 kg (150lb.) per person. Depending on theweight of each person, the seating ca-pacity given may exceed the totalload capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occupants arewithin the seating capacity, do not ex-ceed the total load capacity.

Towing capacityToyota does not recommend towinga trailer with your vehicle. Your ve-hicle is not designed for trailer towing.Cargo capacityCargo capacity may increase or de-crease depending on the size (weight)and the number of occupants. For de-tails, see “Capacity and distribution”that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more thaneach load limit. That may causenot only damage to the tires, butalso deterioration to the steeringability and braking ability, whichmay cause an accident.

When stowing cargo and luggage inthe vehicle, observe the following:� Put cargo and luggage in the lug-

gage compartment when at allpossible. Be sure all items are se-cured in place.

� Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-anced. Locating the weight as farforward as possible helps maintainbalance.

� For better fuel economy, do notcarry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

� To prevent cargo and luggagefrom sliding forward duringbraking, do not stack anythingin the luggage compartment.Keep cargo and luggage low,as close to the floor as pos-sible.

Vehicle load limitsCargo and luggage——Stowage precautions

345

� Never allow anyone to ride inthe luggage compartment. It isnot designed for passengers.They should ride in their seatswith their seat belts properlyfastened. Otherwise, they aremuch more likely to suffer seri-ous bodily injury, in the eventof sudden braking or a colli-sion.

� Do not place anything on theluggage cover. Such items maybe thrown about and possiblyinjure people in the vehicleduring sudden braking or anaccident. Secure all items in asafe place.

� Do not drive with objects lefton top of the instrument panel.They may interfere with thedriver’s field of view. Or theymay move during sharp vehicleacceleration or turning, and im-pair the driver’s control of thevehicle. In an accident theymay injure the vehicle occu-pants.

NOTICE

Do not load the vehicle beyond thevehicle capacity weight given in Sec-tion 9.

Cargo capacity depends on the to-tal weight of the occupants.(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-ity) – (Total weight of occupants)Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit—(1) Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’splacard.

(2) Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

—Capacity and distribution

346

(4) The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example,if the “XXX” amount equals 1400lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and lug-gage load capacity is 650 lbs.(1400–750 (5x150)=650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the available car-go and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

Toyota does not recommend towinga trailer with your vehicle. Your ve-hicle is not designed for trailer towing.

Total loadcapacity

Cargocapacity

Example on Your VehicleIn case that 2 people with the com-bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) areriding in your vehicle with the totalload capacity of 365 kg (810 lb.), theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity will be as follows:365 kg – 166 kg = 199 kg.(810 lb. – 366 lb. = 444 lb.)From this condition, if 3 more passen-gers with the combined weight of 176kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-go and luggage load will be reducedas follows:

347

199 kg – 176 kg = 23 kg.(444 lb. – 388 lb. = 56 lb.)As shown in the above example, if thenumber of occupants increases, thecargo and luggage load equaling thecombined weight of occupants whogot on later must be reduced. In otherwords, if the increase in the numberof occupants causes the excess ofthe total load capacity (combinedweight of occupants plus cargo andluggage load), you have to reduce thecargo and luggage on your vehicle.For details about total load capacity,see “Vehicle load limits” on page 344.

CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-pant’s weight and the cargo loadis less than the total load capac-ity, do not apply the load uneven-ly. That may cause not only dam-age to the tire but also deteriora-tion to the steering ability due tounbalance of the vehicle, causingan accident.

Types of tiresDetermine what kind of tires yourvehicle is originally equipped with.1. All season tiresAll season tires are designed to pro-vide better traction in snow and to beadequate for driving in most winterconditions, as well as for use all yearround.All season tires, however, do not haveadequate traction performancecompared with snow tires in heavy orloose snow. Also, all season tires fallshort in acceleration and handlingperformance compared with summertires in highway driving.

348

2. Summer tiresSummer tires are high−speed capabil-ity tires best suited to highway drivingunder dry conditions.Since summer tires do not have thesame traction performance as snowtires, summer tires are inadequate fordriving on snow−covered or icy roads.For driving on snow−covered or icyroads, we recommend using snowtires. If installing snow tires, be sureto replace all four tires.The details about how to distinguishsummer tires from all season tires aredescribed on page 334.

CAUTION

� Do not mix summer and all sea-son tires on your vehicle asthis can cause dangerous han-dling characteristics, resultingin loss of control.

� Do not use tire other than themanufacturer’s designatedtires, and never mix tires orwheels of the sizes differentfrom the originally equippedtires and wheels.

349

STARTING AND DRIVINGStarting and drivingBefore starting the hybrid system 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the hybrid system 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving in the rain 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer, too 356. . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4

350

1. Check the area around the vehicle be-fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,head restraint height and steeringwheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear viewmirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

When you get in the vehicle, checkwhether the “READY” light is on ornot.

CAUTION

Your vehicle does not produce anynoise or vibration when the vehicle isready to be driven with the “READY”light on. Move your foot carefullyfrom the brake pedal to the accelera-tion pedal when driving.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.

3. Depress the brake pedal and hold itto the floor until driving off.

40p102b

Before starting the hybrid system, be sureto follow the instructions in “(a) Beforestarting the hybrid system”.

Normal starting procedure

Carry the key and press the “POWER”switch briefly and firmly with the brakepedal depressed. The “READY” light startsblinking. After a few seconds, the blinking“READY” light remains on and two beepssound. (If the ambient temperature is low,such as during winter driving conditions,it may take time until the “READY” lightis on.)


Before starting the hybridsystem

How to start the hybridsystem— (a) Before startingthe hybrid system

(b) Turning on the hybridsystem (Using the smartfunction—on some models)

351


When the hybrid system is started orstopped, you may hear a sound comingfrom the hybrid battery in the luggagecompartment. However, this does not indi-cate any trouble.

If there is a problem somewhere in thehybrid system, the hybrid system malfunc-tion warning light will come on in place ofthe “READY” light. If this happens, contactyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Never start the hybrid system fromoutside the vehicle, or an accidentmay occur. Be sure to sit on the driv-er seat, then start the system whendriving.

NOTICE

� The hybrid system cannot bestarted when the shift position is“N”. Be sure to put it in “P” andthen start the system.

� If any warning light comes on (Seepage 125 for details.) or the 12 voltbattery is disconnected, the hybridsystem may not start by pushingthe “POWER” switch. In that case,push it once again. If the “READY”light does not come on, contactyour Toyota dealer.

� When you start the hybrid systemat a lowered outside temperature, itmay take longer before the blinking“READY” light changes to stay on.

40p002d

Before starting the hybrid system, be sureto follow the instructions in “(a) Beforestarting the hybrid system”.

Normal starting procedure

Insert the key and press the “POWER”switch briefly and firmly with the brakepedal depressed. The “READY” light startsblinking. After a few seconds, the blinking“READY” light remains on and two beepssound. (If the ambient temperature is low,such as during winter driving conditions,it may take time until the “READY” lightis on.)


(b) Turning on the hybridsystem (Using the key)

352


When the hybrid system is started orstopped, you may hear a sound comingfrom the hybrid battery in the luggagecompartment. However, this does not indi-cate any trouble.

If there is a problem somewhere in thehybrid system, the hybrid system malfunc-tion warning light will come on in place ofthe “READY” light. If this happens, contactyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Never start the hybrid system fromoutside the vehicle, or an accidentmay occur. Be sure to sit on the driv-er seat, then start the system whendriving.

NOTICE

� The hybrid system cannot bestarted when the shift position is“N”. Be sure to put it in “P” andthen start the system.

� If any warning light comes on (Seepage 125 for details.) or the 12 voltbattery is disconnected, the hybridsystem may not start by pushingthe “POWER” switch. In that case,push it once again. If the “READY”light does not come on, contactyour Toyota dealer.

� When you start the hybrid systemat a lowered outside temperature, itmay take longer before the blinking“READY” light changes to stay on.

� Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.This will allow you much better control.

� Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-sible, at a right angle. Avoid drivingonto high, sharp−edged objects andother road hazards. Failure to do socan lead to severe tire damage suchas a tire burst.Drive slowly when passing over bumpsor travelling on a bumpy road. Other-wise, the impact could cause severedamage to the tires and/or wheels.

� When parking on a hill, turn the frontwheels until they touch the curb sothat the vehicle will not roll. Apply theparking brake, and put the hybridtransaxle “P”. If necessary, block thewheels.

� Washing your vehicle or driving throughdeep water may get the brakes wet. Tosee whether they are wet, check thatthere is no traffic near you, and thenpress the pedal lightly. If you do notfeel a normal braking force, the brakesare probably wet. To dry them, drivethe vehicle cautiously while lightlypressing the brake pedal with the park-ing brake applied. If they still do notwork safely, pull to the side of the roadand call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

Tips for driving in variousconditions

353

CAUTION

� Before driving off, make sure theparking brake is fully released andthe parking brake reminder light isoff.

� Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended with the “READY” light on.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. It can causedangerous overheating, needlesswear, and poor fuel economy.

� To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and downshift.Remember, if you ride the brakesexcessively, they may overheat andnot work properly.

� Be careful when accelerating orbraking on a slippery surface. Sud-den acceleration or engine braking,could cause the vehicle to skid orspin.

� Do not drive in excess of the speedlimit. Even if the legal speed limitpermits it, do not drive over 140km/h (85 mph) unless your vehiclehas high−speed capability tires.Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph)may result in tire failure, loss ofcontrol and possible injury. Be sureto consult a tire dealer to determinewhether the tires on your vehicleare high−speed capability tires ornot before driving at such speeds.

� Do not continue normal drivingwhen the brakes are wet. If they arewet, your vehicle will require a lon-ger stopping distance, and it maypull to one side when the brakesare applied. Also, the parking brakewill not hold the vehicle securely.

Driving on a slippery road surface

Drive carefully when it is raining, becausevisibility will be reduced, the windows maybecome fogged−up, and the road will beslippery.

� Drive carefully when it starts to rain,because the road surface will be espe-cially slippery.

� Refrain from high speeds when drivingon an expressway in the rain, becausethere may be a layer of water betweenthe tires and the road surface, prevent-ing the steering and brakes from oper-ating properly.

Driving in the rain

354

CAUTION

� Sudden braking, acceleration andsteering when driving on a slipperyroad surface may cause tire slip-page and reduce your ability tocontrol the vehicle, resulting in anaccident.

� Sudden changes in engine speed,such as sudden engine braking,may cause the vehicle to skid, re-sulting in an accident.

� After driving through a puddle,lightly depress the brake pedal tomake sure that the brakes are func-tioning properly. Wet brake padsmay prevent the brakes from func-tioning properly. If the brakes ononly one side are wet and not func-tioning properly, steering controlmay be affected, resulting in an ac-cident.

When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has floodedafter heavy rain etc. Doing so may causeserious damage to the vehicle.

NOTICE

Driving on a flooded road may causethe engine to stall as well as causeserious vehicle malfunctions such asshorts in electrical components andengine damage from water immersion.In the event that you drive on aflooded road and the vehicle isflooded, be sure to have your Toyotadealer check brake function, changesin quantity and quality of engine oil,transaxle fluid for the hybrid system,etc. and lubricant condition for thebearings and suspension joints (wherepossible) and the function of all jointsand bearings.

Make sure you have a proper freezeprotection for engine coolant.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,and non−borate coolant with long−lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)

See “Checking the coolant level” on page406 for details of coolant type selection.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −35�C(−31�F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −42�C(−44�F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Winter driving tips

355

Check the condition of the 12 volt bat-tery and cables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity ofany 12 volt battery, so it must be in topshape to provide enough power for winterstarting. Section 8−3 tells you how tovisually inspect the 12 volt battery. YourToyota dealer will be pleased to check thelevel of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for the cold weather.

See page 405 for recommended viscosity.Leaving a heavy summer oil in your ve-hicle during winter months may causeharder starting. If you are not sure aboutwhich oil to use, call your Toyota deal-er—they will be pleased to help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into thelocks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti−freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyotadealer and most auto parts stores. Followthe manufacturer’s directions for howmuch to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake whenthere is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, push the “P” positionswitch and block the rear wheels. Do notuse the parking brake, for snow or wateraccumulated in and around the parkingbrake mechanism may freeze, making ithard to release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulatingunder the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenderscan make steering difficult. During extremewinter driving, stop and check under thefenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,we recommend you carry some emer-gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in thevehicle are tire chains, window scraper,bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,jumper cables, etc.

40p050b

Your vehicle is not designed to bedinghy towed (with four wheels on theground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with fourwheels on the ground. This may causeserious damage to your vehicle.

Dinghy towing

356

40p003b

Toyota does not recommend towing atrailer with your Toyota. Toyota alsodoes not recommend the installation ofa tow hitch or the use of a tow hitchcarrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bi-cycle, etc. Your Toyota is not designedfor trailer towing or for the use of towhitch mounted carriers.

Improving fuel economy is easy−just takeit easy. It will help make your vehicle lastlonger, too. Here are some specific tipson how to save money on both fuel andrepairs:

� Keep your tires inflated at the cor-rect pressure. Underinflation causestire wear and wastes fuel. See page409 for instructions.

� Do not carry unneeded weight inyour vehicle. Excess weight puts aheavier load on the engine, causinggreater fuel consumption.

� Accelerate slowly and smoothly.Avoid jackrabbit starts.

� Avoid continuous speeding up andslowing down. Stop−and−go drivingwastes power.

� Avoid unnecessary stopping andbraking. Maintain a steady pace. Tryto time the traffic signals so you onlyneed to stop as little as possible ortake advantage of through streets toavoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-den braking. This will also reduce wearon your brakes.

� Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jamswhenever possible.

� Do not rest your foot on brake ped-al. This causes premature wear, over-heating and poor fuel economy.

� Maintain a moderate speed on high-ways. The faster you drive, the greaterthe fuel consumption. By reducing yourspeed, you will cut down on fuel con-sumption.

� Keep the front wheels in properalignment. Avoid hitting the curb andslow down on rough roads. Improperalignment not only causes faster tirewear but also puts an extra load onthe engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

� Keep the bottom of your vehicle freefrom mud, etc. This not only lessensweight but also helps prevent corro-sion.

� Keep your vehicle tuned−up and intop shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oiland grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.all lower engine performance and con-tribute to poor fuel economy. For longerlife of all parts and lower operatingcosts, keep all maintenance work onschedule, and if you often drive undersevere conditions, see that your ve-hicle receives more frequent mainte-nance.

Trailer towingHow to save fuel and makeyour vehicle last longer, too

357

CAUTION

Never turn off the hybrid system tocoast down hills. Your power steeringand brake booster will not functionwithout the hybrid system running.Also, the emission control system op-erates properly only when the hybridsystem is running.

359

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCYIn case of an emergencyIf your vehicle will not start 360. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your hybrid system stalls while driving 364. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats 364. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your keys 379. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot operate back door opener 380. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5

360

Before making these checks, make sureyou have followed the correct startingprocedure given in “How to start thehybrid system” on page 350 and that youhave sufficient fuel. Also check whetherthe other keys will start the hybridsystem. If they work, your key may bebroken. Have the key checked at yourToyota dealer. If none of your keys work,there may be a malfunction in the hybridvehicle immobilizer system. Call yourToyota dealer. (See “Keys” on page 20.)

If the instrument cluster dims or theinstrument cluster display turns offwith the hybrid system on—

1. Check that the 12 volt battery terminalsare tight and clean.

2. If the 12 volt battery terminals areO.K., the 12 volt battery is discharged.You may try jump starting. See “(b)Jump starting” for further instructions.

NOTICE

Hybrid vehicles cannot be push−started.

If the instrument cluster is shown inappropriate brightness when the hybridsystem is in the “IG−ON” mode—

The hybrid vehicle system is suspected tobe faulty. Contact your Toyota dealer.

If the 12 volt battery is discharged, thehybrid system can be started by jumpstarting. Depending on the vehicle con-dition, the engine may not start.

To avoid serious personal injury anddamage to your vehicle which might re-sult from battery explosion, acid burns,electrical burns, or damaged electroniccomponents, these instructions must befollowed precisely.

If the 12 volt battery is discharged, youcannot access to the 12 volt battery in theluggage compartment because the backdoor cannot be opened. Use the exclusivejump starting terminal in the enginecompartment. For details, see “JUMPSTARTING PROCEDURE” on page 361.

NOTICE

If the 12 volt battery is dischargedwith the transaxle in “P”, your vehiclecannot be moved unless the frontwheels are raised. This is because thefront wheels are locked by means ofthe parking lock mechanism.

If you are unsure about how to follow thisprocedure, we strongly recommend thatyou seek the help of a competent qualifiedtechnician or towing service.

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks (b) Jump starting

361

CAUTION

� Booster battery contains sulfuricacid which is poisonous and corro-sive. Wear protective safety glasseswhen jump starting, and avoid spil-ling acid on your skin, clothing, orvehicle.

� If you should accidentally get acidon yourself or in your eyes, removeany contaminated clothing and flushthe affected area with water imme-diately. Then get immediate medicalattention. If possible, continue toapply water with a sponge or clothwhile en route to the medical office.

� The gas normally produced by abattery will explode if a flame orspark is brought near. Use onlystandardized jumper cables and donot smoke or light a match whilejump starting.

NOTICE

� The battery used for boosting mustbe 12 V. Do not jump start unlessyou are sure that the booster bat-tery is correct.

� After jump starting procedure, thehybrid system may not start bypushing the “POWER” switch. Inthat case, push it once again. If the“READY” light does not come on,contact your Toyota dealer.

50p049

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. Apply the parking brake and turn offthe headlight switch and interior light.

2. Turn off the hybrid system and removethe key if inserted.

3. Open the hood and fuse block covershown in the above illustration.

362

Exclusive jump startingterminal cover

4. Open the exclusive jump starting termi-nal cover.

5. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, make sure the ve-hicles are not touching. Turn off allunnecessary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery ofmatching or higher quality. Any otherbattery may be difficult to jump startwith. If jump starting is difficult, chargethe battery for several minutes.

6. If required, remove all the vent plugsfrom the booster batteries. Lay a clothover the open vents on the batteries.(This helps reduce the explosion haz-ard, personal injuries and burns.)

7. If the engine in the vehicle with thebooster battery is not running, start itand let it run for a few minutes. Duringjump starting, run the engine at about2000 rpm with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

50p044c

Boosterbattery

Exclusive jump starting terminal

Jumpercable

Positive terminal (“+” mark)

8. Connect the jumper cables in the ordera, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive(red) jumper cable to the exclusivejump starting terminal.

b. Connect the clamp at the other endof the positive (red) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal on thebooster battery.

363

50p045c

Boosterbattery

Negative terminal (“–” mark)

Jumpercable

c. Connect the clamp of the negative(black) jumper cable to the negative(–) terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other endof the negative (black) jumper cableto a solid, stationary, unpainted, me-tallic point of the vehicle with thedischarged battery.

The recommended connecting point isshown in the following illustration:

50p080a

Connecting point

CAUTION

When making the connections, toavoid serious injury, do not lean overthe battery or accidentally let thejumper cables or clamps touch any-thing except the correct battery termi-nals or the ground.

9. Charge the discharged battery with thejumper cables connected for approxi-mately 5 minutes. At this time, run theengine in the vehicle with the boosterbattery at about 2000 rpm with the ac-celerator pedal lightly depressed.

10. Start the hybrid system. Make sure the“READY” light is on. If the hybrid bat-tery warning light comes on in the mul-ti−information display, the hybrid batteryis also discharged. Contact your Toyotadealer.

11. Carefully disconnect the cables in theexact reverse order: the negative cableand then the positive cable.

12. Carefully dispose of the battery covercloths—they may now contain sulfuricacid.

13. If removed, replace all the battery ventplugs.

If the cause of your 12 volt battery dis-charging is not apparent (for example,lights left on), you should have it checkedat your Toyota dealer.

If the first start attempt is not success-ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumpercables are tight. Recharge the dischargedbattery with the jumper cables connectedfor several minutes and restart your hybridsystem in the normal way.

If the another attempt is not successful,the battery may be depleted. Have itchecked at your Toyota dealer.

364

If your hybrid system stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Try starting the hybrid system again.

If the hybrid system will not start, see “Ifyour vehicle will not start” on page 360.

CAUTION

If the hybrid system is not operating,the power assist for the brakes andsteering will not work so steering andbraking will be much harder than usu-al.

If your high coolant temperature warn-ing light comes on, if you experience aloss of power, or if you hear a loudknocking or pinging noise, the hybridsystem has probably overheated. Youshould follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-hicle and turn on your emergencyflashers. Push the “P” position switchand apply the parking brake. Turn offthe air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of theradiator or reservoir, stop the hybridsystem. Wait until the steam subsidesbefore opening the hood. If there is nocoolant boiling over or steam, leave thehybrid system running and make surethe electric cooling fan is operating. Ifit is not, turn the hybrid system off.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keepthe hood closed until there is nosteam. Escaping steam or coolant isa sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from theradiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.However, note that water draining fromthe air conditioning is normal if it hasbeen used.

CAUTION

When the hybrid system is running,keep hands and clothing away fromthe moving fan and engine drivebelts.

4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the hy-brid system immediately. Call a Toyotadealer for assistance.

5. If there are no obvious leaks, checkthe coolant reservoir. If it is dry, addcoolant to the reservoir while the hy-brid system is running. Fill it about halffull.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap when the hybrid system and ra-diator are hot. Serious injury couldresult from scalding hot fluid andsteam blown out under pressure.

If your hybrid system stallswhile driving If your vehicle overheats

365

6. After the coolant temperature hascooled to normal, again check the cool-ant level in the reservoir. If necessary,bring it up to half full again. Seriouscoolant loss indicates a leak in thesystem. You should have it checked assoon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

1. Reduce your speed gradually,keeping a straight line. Move cau-tiously off the road to a safe placewell away from the traffic. Avoidstopping on the center divider ofa highway. Park on a level spotwith firm ground.

2. Stop the hybrid system and turnon your emergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.4. Have everyone get out of the ve-

hicle on the side away from traffic.5. Read the following instructions

thoroughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observethe following to reduce the possi-bility of death or serious injury:� Follow jacking instructions.� Do not put any part of your

body under a vehicle sup-ported by a jack. Personal inju-ry may occur.

� Do not start or run the hybridsystem while your vehicle issupported by the jack.

� Stop the vehicle at a level firmground, firmly set the parkingbrake. Block the wheel diago-nally opposite to the one beingchanged if necessary.

If you have a flat tire—

366

� Make sure to set the jack prop-erly in the jack point. Raisingthe vehicle with jack improper-ly positioned will damage thevehicle or may allow the ve-hicle to fall off the jack andcause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehiclewhen the vehicle is supportedby the jack alone.

� Use the jack only for liftingyour vehicle during wheelchanging.

� Do not raise the vehicle withsomeone in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, donot place any objects on topof or underneath the jack.

� Raise the vehicle only highenough to remove and changethe tire.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with a de-flated tire. Driving even a short dis-tance can damage a tire and wheelbeyond repair.

50p007a

Compact spare tireThe compact spare tire is designedfor temporary emergency use only.The compact spare tire is identifiedby the distinctive wording “TEM-PORARY USE ONLY” molded into theside wall of the tire.The compact spare tire saves spacein your luggage compartment, and itslighter weight helps to improve fueleconomy and permits easier installa-tion in case of a flat tire.

367

The compact spare tire can be usedmany times, if necessary. It has treadlife of up to 4800 km (3000 miles) de-pending on road conditions and yourdriving habits. When tread wear indi-cators appear on the tire, replace thetire.See also the tire information on page411 for details on the tread wear indi-cators and other service information.

CAUTION

� The compact spare tire was de-signed especially for your To-yota. Do not use it on any othervehicle.

� Do not use more than one com-pact spare tire at the sametime.

� Do not exceed 80 km/h (50mph) when driving with thecompact spare tire.

� Replace the compact spare tirewith the standard tire as soonas possible.

� Avoid sudden acceleration,sudden deceleration and sharpturns with the compact sparetire.

NOTICE

Your ground clearance is reducedwhen the compact spare tire isinstalled so avoid driving over ob-stacles and drive slowly on rough, un-paved roads and speed bumps. Also,do not attempt to go through an auto-matic car wash as the vehicle mayget caught, resulting in damage.

368

50p008c

1. Get the required tools and sparetire.1 Wheel nut wrench2 Jack handle3 Jack4 Spare tire

To open the luggage storage box, see“Luggage storage box” on page 315.To prepare yourself for an emergency,you should familiarize yourself withthe use of the jack, each of the toolsand their storage locations.

50p009a

To remove the jack, unlock the tight-ening strap.To store the jack, make sure it is se-curely held by the tightening strap.

50p010e

To remove the spare tire:1. Remove the luggage storage box.2. Loosen the bolt and remove it.3. Remove the jack box.Then take the spare tire out of thevehicle.When storing the spare tire, put it inplace with the inner side of the wheelfacing up. Then secure the tire by re-peating the above removal steps inreverse order to prevent it from flyingforward during a collision or suddenbraking.

—Required tools and sparetire

369

When installing the jack box, align thearrows on the jack box with the oneson the body.

50p011b

2. Block the wheel diagonally op-posite the flat tire to keep thevehicle from rolling when it isjacked up.

When chocking the wheel, place awheel block in front of one of the frontwheels or behind one of the rearwheels.

50p051b

3. Loosen all the wheel nuts.Always loosen the wheel nuts beforeraising the vehicle.Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwiseto loosen them. To get maximum le-verage, fit the wrench to the nut sothat the handle is on the right side,as shown above. Grab the wrenchnear the end of the handle and pullup on the handle. Be careful that thewrench does not slip off the nut.Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-screw them about one−half turn in theorder shown.

—Blocking the wheel —Loosening wheel nuts

370

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. The nuts may loos-en and the wheels may fall off,which could cause a serious ac-cident.

50p014e

4. Position the jack at the jackpoints as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned ona level and solid place.

50p015c

5. After making sure no one is inthe vehicle, raise it high enoughso that the spare tire can beinstalled.

Remember you will need more groundclearance when putting on the sparetire than when removing the flat tire.To raise the vehicle, insert the jackhandle into the jack (it is a loose fit)and turn it clockwise. As the jacktouches the vehicle and begins to lift,double−check that it is properly posi-tioned.

—Positioning the jack —Raising your vehicle

371

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by thejack alone.

50p052

6. Remove the wheel nuts andchange tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put itaside.Roll the spare wheel into position andalign the holes in the wheel with thebolts. Then lift up the wheel and getat least the top bolt started throughits hole. Wiggle the tire and press itback over the other bolts.

50p017c

Before putting on wheels, remove anycorrosion on the mounting surfaceswith a wire brush or such. Installationof wheels without good metal−to−met-al contact at the mounting surface cancause wheel nuts to loosen and even-tually cause a wheel to come off whiledriving.

—Changing wheels

372

50p018c

7. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered endinward) and tighten them as much asyou can by hand. Press back on thetire and see if you can tighten themmore.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. Doing so may leadto overtightening the nuts anddamaging the bolts. The nutsmay loosen and the wheels mayfall off, which could cause a seri-ous accident. If there is oil orgrease on any bolt or nut, cleanit.

50p019c

8. Lower the vehicle completelyand tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle counterclock-wise to lower the vehicle.Use only the wheel nut wrench totighten the nuts. Do not use othertools or any additional leverage otherthan your hands, such as a hammer,pipe or your foot. Make sure thewrench is securely engaged over thenut.Tighten each nut a little at a time inthe order shown. Repeat the processuntil all the nuts are tight.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts —Lowering your vehicle

373

CAUTION

� When lowering the vehicle,make sure all portions of yourbody and all other personsaround will not be injured asthe vehicle is lowered to theground.

� Have the wheel nuts tightenedwith torque wrench to 103 N·m(10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soonas possible after changingwheels. Otherwise, the nutsmay loosen and the wheelsmay fall off, which could causea serious accident.

� Do not attach a heavily dam-aged plastic wheel ornament.It may fly off the wheel andcause accidents while the ve-hicle is moving.

9. Restow all the tools and jack se-curely. Then secure the flat tirein the luggage compartmentwith the tire tie−down belts andtie−down hooks as follows

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools and jack are securely inplace in their storage location toreduce the possibility of person-al injury during a collision orsudden braking.

50p087

1. Before stowing the flat tire, removethe center wheel ornament bypushing from the reverse side.

Be careful not to lose the wheel orna-ment.

—Stowing flat tire

374

50p088

2. Put the flat tire on the center ofthe luggage storage box lid withthe outer side of the wheel facingup. Hook one ends of the belts tothe front tie−down hooks.

50p089

3. Pass the belts through the centerhole of the wheel as shown above.

50p090

4. Attach the other ends of the beltsto the rear tie−down hooks.

After stowing the flat tire, check thatthe tire and belts are secured.

375

CAUTION

� Make sure the rear seats are intheir original position.

� When carrying the flat tire, se-cure it using a tire tie−downbelts. Otherwise, the flat tiremay fly out in case of the sud-den braking or an accident, re-sulting in death or serious inju-ry.

10. Check the air pressure of the re-placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-cation designated on page 434. If thepressure is lower than specified, driveslowly to the nearest Toyota dealerand fill to the correct pressure.Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-tion valve cap as dirt and moisturecould get into the valve core and pos-sibly cause air leakage. If the cap ismissing, have a new one put on assoon as possible.As soon as possible after changingwheels, tighten the wheel nuts to thetorque specified on page 434 with atorque wrench. Have a technician re-pair the flat tire.After repairing the flat tire, change itwith compact spare tire and reinstallthe wheel ornament.

CAUTION

Take due care in handling the or-nament to avoid unexpected per-sonal injury.

—After changing wheels

376

50p021b

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck——From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice. In consultation with them, haveyour vehicle towed using either (a) or(b).

Only when you cannot receive a towingservice from a Toyota dealer or com-mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-hicle carefully in accordance with theinstructions given in “—Emergency tow-ing” on page 377.

Proper equipment will help ensure thatyour vehicle is not damaged while beingtowed. Commercial operators are generallyaware of the state/provincial and locallaws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it istowed incorrectly. Although most operatorsknow the correct procedure, it is possibleto make a mistake. To avoid damage toyour vehicle, make sure the following pre-cautions are observed. If necessary, showthis page to the tow truck driver.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,and abide by the state/provincial and locallaws. The wheels and axle on the groundmust be in good condition. If they aredamaged, use a towing dolly.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—Release the parking brake.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to en-sure adequate ground clearance fortowing at the opposite end of theraised vehicle. Otherwise, the under-body of the towed vehicle will bedamaged during towing.

From rear—Use a towing dolly under thefront wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the rearwith the front wheels on the ground,as this may cause serious damage tothe transmission.

(b) Using flat bed truck

If your vehicle needs to betowed—

377

50p022b

(c) Towing with sling type truck

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-ther from the front or rear. This maycause body damage.

50p035b

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice.

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tempo-rarily towed by a cable or chain se-cured to emergency towing eyelet in-side of front bumper. Use extremecaution when towing vehicles.

NOTICE

� Only use specified towing eyelet;otherwise your vehicle may be dam-aged.

� Never tow a vehicle from the rearwith four wheels on the ground.This may cause serious damage tothe transaxle.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steerit and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard−surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, drive train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.

—Emergency towing

378

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve-hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erraticdriving maneuvers which would placeexcessive stress on the emergencytowing eyelet and towing cable orchain. The eyelet and towing cable orchain may break and cause seriousinjury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specificallyintended for use in towing vehicles.Securely fasten the cable or chain tothe towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brakeand put the hybrid transaxle in “N”. Thehybrid system must be in the “IG−ON”mode.

In the following cases, as the front wheelsmight be locked by means of the parkinglock mechanism, your vehicle cannot betowed by another vehicle using a rope.Have your vehicle carried with the frontwheels or all the wheels raised.

� If the parking mechanism fails.

� If the 12 volt battery is discharged.

CAUTION

If the hybrid system is not running,the power assist for the brakes andsteering will not work so steering andbraking will be much harder than usu-al.

50p046a

1. Remove the towing eyelet as shown inthe illustration.

—Installing towing eyelet

379

50p047a

2. Secure the towing eyelet to the hole onthe bumper by turning it clockwise.

50p048a

3. Tighten the towing eyelet securely bya wheel nut wrench.

CAUTION

When installing the eyelet on the ve-hicle, be sure to tighten the eyeletsecurely. If the eyelet is loose, it maycome off when being towed and re-sult in death or serious injury.

You can purchase a new key at yourToyota dealer if you can give them thekey number and master key.

Even if you lose only one key, contactyour Toyota dealer to make a new key. Ifyou lose all your master keys, you cannotmake new keys; the whole hybrid vehicleimmobilizer system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” onpage 20.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle andyou cannot get a duplicate, many Toyotadealers can still open the door for you,using their special tools. If you mustbreak a window to get in, we suggestbreaking the smallest side window be-cause it is the least expensive to replace.Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts fromthe glass.

If you lose your keys

380

50p053a

If the back door opener does not oper-ate, you can open the back door fromthe inside.

To open the back door from inside, per-form the following procedure.

1. Open the luggage storage box (See“Luggage storage box” on page 315.)and remove the cover.

50p054a

2. Pull the lever with the back door mo-tor, open the back door.

Be sure to have the back door openerchecked/repaired by your Toyota dealer.

If you cannot operate backdoor opener

381

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARECorrosion prevention and appearance careProtecting your Toyota from corrosion 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing your Toyota 383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior 385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 6

382

Toyota, through the diligent research, de-sign and use of the most advancedtechnology available, helps prevent corro-sion and provides you with the finest qual-ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up toyou. Proper care of your Toyota can helpensure long−term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosionto your vehicle are:

� The accumulation of road salt, dirt andmoisture in hard−to−reach areas underthe vehicle.

� Chipping of paint, or undercoatingcaused by minor accidents or bystones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you livein particular areas or operate your ve-hicle under certain environmental condi-tions:

� Road salt or dust control chemicals willaccelerate corrosion, as will the pres-ence of salt in the air near the sea−coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

� High humidity accelerates corrosion es-pecially when temperatures range justabove the freezing point.

� Wetness or dampness to certain partsof your vehicle for an extended periodof time, may cause corrosion eventhough other parts of the vehicle maybe dry.

� High ambient temperatures can causecorrosion to those components of thevehicle which do not dry quickly due tolack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keepyour vehicle, particularly the underside, asclean as possible and to repair any dam-age to paint or protective coatings assoon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on yourToyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, ofcourse, necessary to keep your vehicleclean by regular washing, but to preventcorrosion, the following points should beobserved:

� If you drive on salted roads in thewinter or if you live near the ocean,you should hose off the undercarriageat least once a month to minimize cor-rosion.

� Pay particular attention to the vehicle’sunderside and wheel housings as it isdifficult to see all the mud and dirt. Itwill do more harm than good to simplywet the mud and debris without remov-ing. The lower edge of doors, rockerpanels and frame members have drainholes which should not be allowed toclog with dirt as trapped water in theseareas can cause corrosion.

� Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” formore tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’spaint and trim. If you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them up im-mediately to prevent corrosion from start-ing. If the chips or scratches have gonethrough the bare metal, have a qualifiedbody shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota fromcorrosion

383

Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-ter and dirt can accumulate under thefloor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry. Be particularly care-ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should betransported in proper containers. If a spillor leak should occur, immediately cleanand dry the area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilatedgarage or a roofed place. Do not parkyour vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-lated garage. If you wash your vehicle inthe garage, or if you drive it covered withwater or snow, your garage may be sodamp and it will cause corrosion. Even ifyour garage is heated, a wet vehicle cancorrode if the ventilation is poor.

Your Toyota is a hybrid vehicle. Payparticular attention when washing yourToyota.

NOTICE

Before washing your Toyota, be sureto observe the following in order toavoid the risk of damage to your ve-hicle.

Do not splash water on the electriccomponents in the engine compart-ment. This may cause the malfunctionof the electric components.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regularwashing.

The following cases may cause weaknessto the paint or corrosion to the body andparts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

� When driving in a coastal area

� When driving on a road sprinkled withantifreeze

� When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,bird droppings and carcass of an insect

� When driving in areas where there isa lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust orchemical substances

� When the vehicle becomes remarkablydirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until thevehicle body is not warm to the touch.

CAUTION

� When cleaning under floor or chas-sis, be careful not to injure yourhands.

� Exhaust gasses cause the exhaustpipe to become quite hot. Whenwashing the vehicle, be careful notto touch the pipe until it has cooledsufficiently, as touching a hot ex-haust pipe can cause burns.

Washing and waxing your Toyota

384

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-move any mud or road salt from theunderside of the vehicle or the wheelwells.

2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,mixed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. Use a soft cotton mitt andkeep it wet by dipping it frequently intothe wash water. Do not rub hard—letthe soap and water remove the dirt.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plasticwheel ornaments are damaged easily byorganic substances. If any organic sub-stances splash an ornament, be sure towash them off with water and check if theornament is damaged.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soapor neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do notscrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumperfaces are soft.

Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do notuse organic substances or scrub themwith a hard brush. This may damage thesurfaces of the lights.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine orcleaners that are marked safe for paintedsurfaces.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap cancause streaking. In hot weather youmay need to rinse each section rightafter you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicleusing a clean soft cotton towel. Do notrub or press hard—you might scratchthe paint.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances(gasoline kerosene, benzine orstrong solvents) which may be toxicor cause damage.

� Do not scrub any part of the ve-hicle with a hard brush, which maycause damage.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-matic car wash, but remember that thepaint can be scratched by some types ofbrushes, unfiltered washing water, or thewashing process itself. Scratching reducespaint durability and gloss, especially ondarker colors. The manager of the carwash should be able to advise you wheth-er the process is safe for the paint onyour vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure to remove it before drivingthrough an automatic car wash.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommendedto maintain the original beauty of yourToyota’s finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehiclesurface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-fore you begin waxing, even if you areusing a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. Ifthe finish has become extremely weath-ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions. Be sure to polish and waxthe chrome trim as well as the paint.

Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on thesurfaces of the lights. Wax may causedamage to the lenses. If you accidentallyput wax on the light surfaces, wipe orwash it off.

385

3. Wax the vehicle again when waterdoes not bead but remains on the sur-face in large patches.

CAUTION

� Do not wash the vehicle floor withwater, or allow water to get ontothe floor when cleaning the vehicleinterior or exterior. Water may getinto audio components or otherelectrical components above or un-der the floor carpet (or mat) andcause fire or malfunction; and itmay cause body corrosion.

� Vehicles with side airbags:Be careful not to splash water orspill liquid on the floor. This mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, resulting in deathor serious injury.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easilycleaned with a mild soap or detergentand water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge orsoft cloth, apply the soap solution to thevinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a fewminutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirtand wipe off the soap with a clean dampcloth. If all the dirt does not come off,repeat the procedure. Commercial foam-ing−type vinyl cleaners are also availablewhich work well. Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasolineor window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foam−type shampoo toclean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to removeas much dirt as possible. Several types offoam cleaners are available; some are inaerosol cans and others are powders orliquids which you mix with water to pro-duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.Rub in overlapping circles.

Cleaning the interior

386

Do not apply water—the best results areobtained by keeping the carpet as dry aspossible. Read the shampoo instructionsand follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned withmild soap and water or with lukewarmwater.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-ing, check the belts for excessive wear,fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

� Do not use dye or bleach on thebelts−it may weaken them.

� Do not use the belts until they be-come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with anyhousehold window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the win-dows, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires on the rearwindow.

Air conditioning control panel, audio,instrument panel, console panel, andswitches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances (sol-vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discol-oring, staining or peeling of thesurface.

� If you use cleaners or polishingagents, make sure their ingredientsdo not include the substances men-tioned above.

� If you use a liquid car freshener, donot apply the liquid onto the ve-hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-tain the ingredients mentionedabove. Immediately clean any spillusing the method mentioned above.

387

Leather interior

The leather upholstery may be cleanedwith neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampenedwith 5% solution of neutral detergent forwool. Then thoroughly wipe off all tracesof detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of theleather gets wet, dry with a soft cleancloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-lated shaded area.

NOTICE

� If a stain should fail to come outwith a neutral detergent, apply acleaner that does not contain anorganic solvent.

� Never use organic substances suchas benzine, alcohol or gasoline, oralkaline or acid solutions for clean-ing the leather as these couldcause discoloring.

� Use of a nylon brush or syntheticfiber cloth, etc. may scratch thefine grained surface of the leather.

� Mildew may develop on soiled leath-er upholstery. Be especially carefulto avoid oil spots. Try to keep yourupholstery always clean.

� Long exposure to direct sunlightmay cause the leather surface toharden and shrink. Keep your ve-hicle in a shaded area, especially inthe summer.

� The interior of your vehicle is aptto heat up on hot summer days, soavoid placing on the upholsteryitems made of vinyl or plastic orcontaining wax as these tend tostick to leather when warm.

� Improper cleaning of the leather up-holstery could result in discolor-ation or staining.

If you have any questions about thecleaning of your Toyota, your localToyota dealer will be pleased to answerthem.

389

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CAREVehicle maintenance and careMaintenance requirements 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 391. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs 394. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the”Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or ”Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 7

390

Maintenance requirementsYour Toyota vehicle has been designed forfewer maintenance requirements with long-er service intervals to save both your timeand money. However, each regular mainte-nance, as well as day−to−day care, ismore important than ever before to ensuresmooth, trouble−free, safe, and economicaldriving.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure the specified maintenance, includinggeneral maintenance service, is performed.Note that both the new vehicle andemission control system warranties specifythat proper maintenance and care must beperformed. See “Owner’s WarrantyInformation Booklet” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement” for complete warrantyinformation.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day−to−day care practices that are important toyour vehicle for proper operation. It is theowner’s responsibility to ensure that thegeneral maintenance items are performedregularly.

These checks or inspections can be doneeither by yourself or a qualified technician,or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will bepleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are thoserequired to be serviced at regular inter-vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that only genuineToyota parts be used for maintenanceor for the repair of the emission con-trol system.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyotasupplied parts for replacement pur-poses without invalidating the emissioncontrol system warranty. However, useof replacement parts which are not ofequivalent quality may impair the effec-tiveness of the emission control sys-tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-nance, replacement, or repair of theemission control devices and systemperformed by any automotive repair es-tablishment or individual without invali-dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’sManual Supplement” for complete war-ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in−dealershiptraining programs. They learn to work onToyotas before they work on your vehicle,rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyotadealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle–reliably and eco-nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof thatall required maintenance has been per-formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-lems should arise with your vehicle whileunder warranty, your Toyota dealer willpromptly take care of it. Again, be sureto keep a copy of the repair order for anyservice performed on your Toyota.

What about do−it−yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easyto do yourself if you have a little mechani-cal ability and a few basic automotivetools. Simple instructions for how to per-form them are presented in Section 8.

391

If you are a skilled do−it−yourselfmechanic, the Toyota service manuals arerecommended. Please be aware thatdo−it−yourself maintenance can affect yourwarranty coverage. See “Owner’s WarrantyInformation Booklet” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement” for the details.

General maintenanceListed below are the general maintenanceitems that should be performed as fre-quently as specified. In addition to check-ing the items listed, if you notice anyunusual noise, smell or vibration, youshould investigate the cause or take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop immediately. It is recom-mended that any problem you notice bebrought to the attention of your dealer orthe qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-quate ventilation if you run the en-gine.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checkedfrom time to time, e.g. each time whenrefueling.

Washer fluidMake sure there is sufficient fluid in thetank. See page 422 for additional informa-tion.

Coolant levelMake sure the coolant level is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see−through reservoir when the hybrid systemis cold. See page 406 for additional infor-mation.

Radiator, condenser and hosesCheck that the front of the radiator andcondenser are clean and not blocked withleaves, dirt, or insects. See page 408 foradditional information.

Brake fluid levelMake sure the brake fluid level is correct.See page 408 for additional information.

Engine oil levelCheck the level on the dipstick with theengine turned off and the vehicle parkedon level spot. See page 404 for additionalinformation.

Exhaust systemIf you notice any change in the sound ofthe exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, havethe cause located and corrected immedi-ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” onpage 324.)

392

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checkedregularly, e.g. while performing periodicservices, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

LightsMake sure the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzersCheck that all service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheelBe alert for changes in steering condition,such as hard steering or strange noise.

SeatsCheck that all front seat controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op-erate smoothly and that all latches locksecurely in any position. Check that thehead restraint move up and down smooth-ly and that the locks hold securely in anylatched position.

Seat beltsCheck that the seat belt system such asbuckles, retractors and anchors operateproperly and smoothly. Make sure the beltwebbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-aged.

Accelerator pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation anduneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation andthat the pedal has the proper clearance.Check the brake booster function.

BrakesIn a safe place, check that the brakes donot pull to one side when applied.

Parking brakeCheck that the pedal has the proper traveland that, on a safe incline, your vehicleis held securely with only the parkingbrake applied.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performedfrom time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Fluid leaksCheck underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-ter or other fluid after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. If you smell fuelfumes or notice any leak, have the causefound and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hoodCheck that all doors and trunk operatesmoothly and all latches lock securely.Make sure the engine hood secondarylatch secures the hood from opening whenthe primary latch is released.

Tire inflation pressureCheck the pressure with a gauge ev-ery two weeks, or at least once amonth. See page 409 for additionalinformation.

393

Tire surface and wheel nutsCheck the tires carefully for cuts,damage or excessive wear. See Sec-tion 8−2 for additional information.When checking the tires, make sureno nuts are missing, and check thenuts for looseness. Tighten them ifnecessary.Tire rotationRotate the tires according to themaintenance schedule. (For sched-uled maintenance information, pleaserefer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.) See page 413 for additionalinformation.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs thatindicate service is needed. Some impor-tant clues are as follows:

� Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

� Appreciable loss of power

� Strange engine noises

� A fluid leak under the vehicle (however,water dripping from the air conditioningafter use is normal.)

� Change in exhaust sound (This mayindicate a dangerous carbon monoxideleak. Drive with the windows open andhave the exhaust system checked im-mediately.)

� Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squealwhen cornering; uneven tire wear

� Vehicle pulls to one side when drivingstraight on a level road

� Strange noises related to suspensionmovement

� Loss of brake effectiveness; spongyfeeling brake pedal; pedal almosttouches floor; vehicle pulls to one sidewhen braking

� Coolant temperature continually higherthan normal

If you notice any of these clues, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. It probably needs adjustment orrepair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-hicle unchecked. It could result in se-rious vehicle damage and possiblypersonal injury.

Does your vehicle need repairing?

394

Some states have vehicle emission in-spection programs which include OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operationof the emission control system. When theOBD system determines that a problemexists somewhere in the emission controlsystem, the malfunction indicator lampcomes on. In this case, your vehicle maynot pass the I/M test and need to berepaired. Contact your Toyota dealer toservice the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lampdoes not come on, your vehicle may notpass the I/M test as readiness codeshave not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically setduring ordinary driving. However, when thebattery is disconnected or run down, thecodes are erased. Also, depending onyour driving habits, the codes may not becompletely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp hadcome on recently due to temporary mal-function such as a loose fuel tank cap,your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips, but theerror code in the OBD system will not becleared unless about 40 trips or more aretaken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M testand the malfunction indicator lamp doesnot come on, contact your Toyota dealerto prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

Emissions inspection andmaintenance (I/M) programs

395

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEIntroductionEngine compartment overview 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse locations 397. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do−it−yourself service precautions 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning the jack 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools 401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8– 1

396

Engine compartment overview

1. Windshield washer fluid tank

2. Brake fluid reservoir

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Inverter coolant reservoir

6. Fuse block

7. Radiator and condenser

8. Engine oil level dipstick

9. 12 volt battery(in luggage compartment)

81p001g

397

81p002c

81p003b

81p005b

81p006c

Fuse locations

398

If you perform maintenance by yourself,be sure to follow the correct proceduregiven in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-complete servicing may result in operatingproblems.

Performing do−it−yourself maintenanceduring the warranty period may affect yourwarranty coverage. Read the separateToyota Warranty statement for details andsuggestions.

This Section gives instructions only forthose items that are relatively easy for anowner to perform. As explained in Section7, there are still a number of items thatmust be done by a qualified technicianwith special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do−it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts andtools” on page 401.

Utmost care should be taken when work-ing on your vehicle to prevent accidentalinjury. Here are a few precautions thatyou should be especially careful to ob-serve:

CAUTION

� When the hybrid system is on, keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom the moving fan and enginedrive belts. (Removing rings,watches, and ties is advisable.)

� Right after driving, the enginecompartment—the engine, radiator,exhaust manifold and spark plugboots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-ful not to touch them. Oil, fluidsand spark plugs may also be hot.

� If the hybrid system is hot, do notremove the radiator cap or loosenthe drain plugs to prevent burningyourself.

� Do not leave anything that mayburn easily, such as paper or rags,in the engine compartment.

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames around fuel or thebatteries. Their fumes are flam-mable.

� When the hybrid system is operat-ing with the “READY” light on, theengine is automatically started insome case. When you inspect theengine compartment, be sure topress the “POWER” switch to the“OFF” mode.

� Do not get under your vehicle withjust the body jack supporting it. Al-ways use automotive jack stands orother solid supports.

� Be sure that the hybrid system isin the “OFF” mode if you work nearthe electric cooling fans or radiatorgrille. With the ignition on, theelectric cooling fans will automati-cally start to run if the engine cool-ant temperature is high and/or theair conditioning is on.

� Use eye protection whenever youwork on or under your vehiclewhere you may be exposed to fly-ing or falling material, fluid spray,etc.

� Be extremely cautious when work-ing on the batteries. It contains poi-sonous and corrosive sulfuric acidor strong alkali.

Do−it−yourself serviceprecautions

399

� Used engine oil contains potentiallyharmful contaminants which maycause skin disorders such as in-flammation or skin cancer, so careshould be taken to avoid prolongedand repeated contact with it. To re-move used engine oil from yourskin, wash thoroughly with soapand water.

� Do not leave used oil within thereach of children.

� Dispose of used oil and filter onlyin a safe and acceptable manner.Do not dispose of used oil and fil-ter in household trash, in sewers oronto the ground. Call your dealerfor information concerning recyclingor disposal.

� Take care when filling the brakefluid reservoir because brake fluidcan harm your eyes and damagepainted surfaces. If fluid gets inyour eyes, flush your eyes withclean water immediately. If you stillfeel uncomfortable with your eyes,go to the doctor.

� When servicing the vehicle with thesmart entry and start system, besure to keep the smart key awayfrom the vehicle. If the key is leftin the vehicle, the hybrid systemmay start by pressing the “POWER”switch with the brake pedal de-pressed.

NOTICE

� Remember that batteries and igni-tion cable carry high currents orvoltages. Be careful of accidentallycausing a short circuit.

� Add only “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality eth-ylene glycol based non−silicate,non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−bo-rate coolant with long−life hybridorganic acid technology to fill theradiator. “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-ant and 50% deionized water (forthe U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%deionized water (for Canada).

� If you spill some of the coolant, besure to wash it off with water toprevent it from damaging the partsor paint.

� Do not allow dirt or anything elseto fall through the spark plug holes.

� Do not pry the outer electrode ofspark plug against the center elec-trode.

� Use only spark plugs of the speci-fied type. Using other types willcause engine damage, loss of per-formance or radio noise.

� If the brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle, be sure to wash it off withwater to prevent it damage to partsor paint.

� Do not drive with the air cleanerfilter removed, or excessive enginewear could result. Also backfiringcould cause a fire in the enginecompartment.

� Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

� When closing the hood, check tosee that you have not forgotten anytools, rags, etc.

400

Positioning the jack

81p008d

Front

81p009d

Rear

When jacking up your vehicle with thejack, position the jack correctly asshown in the illustrations.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe thefollowing to reduce the possibility ofpersonal injury:

� Follow jacking instructions.

� Do not put any part of your bodyunder the vehicle supported by thejack. Personal injury may occur.

� Do not start or run the engine whileyour vehicle is supported by thejack.

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parking brakeand put the transaxle in “P”.

� Make sure to set the jack properlyin the jack point. Raising the ve-hicle with jack improperly posi-tioned will damage the vehicle ormay allow the vehicle to fall off thejack and cause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by the jackalone.

� Do not raise the vehicle with some-one in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, do notplace any objects on top of or un-derneath the jack.

NOTICE

Make sure to place the jack correctly,or your vehicle may be damaged.

401

Parts and toolsHere is a list of parts and tools you willneed to perform do−it−yourself mainte-nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-signed in metric sizes, so your tools mustbe metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

� Engine oil ILSAC multigrade having vis-cosity proper for your climate

Tools:

� Rag or paper towel

� Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL


� “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” orsimilar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−ni-trite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is amixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%coolant and 45% deionized water (forCanada).

Tools:

� Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID


� SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3brake fluid

Tools:

� Rag or paper towel

� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING 12 VOLT BATTERY CON-DITION

Tools:

� Warm water

� Baking soda

� Grease

� Conventional wrench (for terminalclamp bolts)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

� Fuse with same amperage rating asoriginal

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

� Water

� Washer fluid containing antifreeze (forwinter use)

Tools:

� Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

� Bulb with same number and wattagerating as original (See charts in “Re-placing light bulbs–” on page 422.)

Tools:

� Screwdriver

403

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEEngine and ChassisChecking the engine oil level 404. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the coolant level 406. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser 408. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 408. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire inflation pressure 409. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 411. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 414. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 416. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8– 2

404

82p001a

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

With the hybrid system at operatingtemperature and turned off, check theoil level on the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicleshould be on level ground. After turningoff the hybrid system, wait a few min-utes for the oil to drain back into thebottom of the engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold the rag un-der the end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as faras it will go, or the reading will not becorrect.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oillevel while holding a rag under theend.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil onthe vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightlyabove the low level, add engine oil ofthe same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engineoil in small quantities at a time, checkingthe dipstick. We recommend that you usea funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed toraise the level between low and full on thedipstick is indicated as follows:

1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp.qt.)

For the engine oil capacity, see “Servicespecifications” on page 431.

When the level reaches within the correctrange, install the filler cap hand−tight.

Checking the engine oil level

405

NOTICE

� Be careful not to spill engine oil onthe vehicle components.

� Avoid overfilling, or the hybrid sys-tem could be damaged.

� Check the oil level on the dipstickonce again after adding the oil.

ENGINE OIL SELECTION

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade and viscos-ity.

Oil grade:

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:SAE 5W−30

oil008

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice, for goodfuel economy, and good starting in coldweather.

If SAE 5W−30 oil is not available, SAE10W−30 oil may be used. However, itshould be replaced with SAE 5W−30 atthe next oil change.

406

Oil identification mark

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-fication Mark is added to some oil con-tainers to help you select the oil youshould use.

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-mance for your engine, “Toyota GenuineMotor Oil” is available, which has beenspecifically tested and approved for allToyota engines.Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details about “Toyota Genuine MotorOil”.

82P111

Engine coolant reservoir

82P112

Inverter coolant reservoir

Checking the coolant level

407

CAUTION

The coolant heat storage tank reacheshigh temperature inside. It is danger-ous if hot coolant is discharged whenreplacing. For replacement of thecoolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

Look at the see−through coolant reser-voir when the hybrid system is cold.The coolant level is satisfactory if it isbetween the “FULL” and “LOW” lineson the reservoir. If the level is low, addthe coolant. (For the coolant type, see“Coolant type selection” described be-low.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith hybrid system temperature. However,if the level is on or below the “LOW” line,add coolant. Bring the level up to the“FULL” line.

If the coolant level drops within a shorttime after replenishing, there may be aleak in the system. Visually check theradiator, hoses, radiator cap and draincock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyotadealer test the cap pressure and checkfor leaks in the cooling system.

If the fluid level in the inverter coolantreservoir is low, there may be a problemwith the cooling system. Have the vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do notremove the radiator cap when the en-gine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damageyour cooling system.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,and non−borate coolant with long−lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −35�C(−31�F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −42�C(−44�F).

NOTICE


408

Toyota recommends “Toyota Super LongLife Coolant”, which has been tested toensure that it will not cause corrosion norresult in malfunction of your coolant sys-tem with proper usage. “Toyota SuperLong Life Coolant” is formulated withlong−life hybrid organic acid technologyand has been specifically designed toavoid cooling system malfunction onToyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

If either of the above parts is extremelydirty or you are not sure of their condi-tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-ful not to touch the radiator or con-denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiatorand condenser, do not perform thework by yourself.

Checking brake fluid

82p002b

To check the fluid level, simply look atthe see−through reservoir. The levelshould be between the “MAX” and“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to godown slightly as the brake pads wear orwhen the fluid level in the accumulator ishigh.

Checking the radiator andcondenser

409

If the level is low, take your vehicle toa Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Donot drive if the red brake system warn-ing light is on. Call a Toyota dealer forassistance.

If the fluid level goes down soon afteryour vehicle is serviced, it may indicatea serious mechanical problem.

CAUTION

Brake fluid can harm your hands oreyes. If fluid gets on your hands orin your eyes, flush the affected areawith clean water immediately. If youstill feel uncomfortable with yourhands or eyes, go to the doctor.

NOTICE

If you spill some of the fluid, be sureto wipe it off to prevent it from dam-aging the parts or paintwork.

82p105b

Keep your tire inflation pressuresat the proper level.The recommended cold tire inflationpressures, tire sizes and the com-bined weight of occupants and cargo(vehicle capacity weight) are de-scribed on pages 430 and 434. Theyare also described on the tire andloading information label as shown.You should check the tire inflationpressure every two weeks, or at leastonce a month. And do not forget thespare!The following instructions forchecking tire inflation pressureshould be observed:� The pressure should be

checked only when the tires arecold. If your vehicle has beenparked for at least 3 hours and hasnot been driven for more than 1.5km or 1 mile since, you will getan accurate cold tire inflation pres-sure reading.

Checking tire inflationpressure

410

� Always use a tire inflation pres-sure gauge. The appearance ofa tire can be misleading. Besides,tire inflation pressures that areeven just a few pounds off can de-grade ride and handling.

� Take special care when addingair to the compact spare tire.The smaller tire size can gainpressure very quickly. Add com-pressed air in small quantities andcheck the pressure often until itreaches the specified pressure.

� Do not bleed or reduce tireinflation pressure after driving.It is normal for the tire inflationpressure to be higher after driving.

� Never exceed the vehicle capac-ity weight. Passenger and lug-gage weight should be located sothat the vehicle is balanced.

Tire inflation pressure gauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTPROCEDURE1. Remove the tire valve cap.2. Press the tip of the tire inflation

pressure gauge to the tire valve.3. Read the pressure using the grad-

uations of the gauge.4. In case the tire inflation pressure

is not within the prescribed range,insert the compressed air from thevalve. In case of applying too muchair, press the center of the valveand release the air to adjust.

5. After completing the tire inflationpressure measurement and adjust-ment, apply soapy water to thevalve and check for leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap.If a gauge and air pump are not avail-able, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valvecaps. Without the valve caps, dirtor moisture could get into thevalve core and cause air leakage.If the caps have been lost, havenew ones put on as soon as pos-sible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressuremay waste fuel, reduce the comfortof driving, reduce tire life andmake your vehicle less safe todrive.If a tire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by your Toyota deal-er.

411

CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated.Otherwise, the following condi-tions may occur and cause an ac-cident resulting in death or seri-ous injuries.Low tire pressure (underinfla-tion)—� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� Poor handling� Possibility of blowouts from an

overheated tire� Poor sealing of the tire bead� Wheel deformation and/or tire

separation� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinfla-tion)—� Poor handling� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRESCheck the tire’s tread for treadwear indicators. If the indicatorsshow, replace the tires. The loca-tion of tread wear indicators isshown by the “TWI” or “Δ” marks,etc., molded on the sidewall ofeach tire.

Checking and replacing tires

412

The tires on your Toyota have built−intread wear indicators to help youknow when the tires need replace-ment. When the tread depth wears to1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica-tors will appear. If you can see theindicators in two or more adjacentgrooves, the tire should be replaced.The lower the tread, the higher therisk of skidding.The effectiveness of snow tires islost if the tread wears down below4 mm (0.16 in.).If you have tire damage such ascuts, splits, cracks deep enough toexpose the fabric, or bulges indi-cating internal damage, the tireshould be replaced.If a tire often goes flat or cannot beproperly repaired due to the size orlocation of a cut or other damage, itshould be replaced. If you are notsure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do notcontinue driving. Driving even a shortdistance can damage a tire beyondrepair.Any tires which are over 6 yearsold must be checked by a qualifiedtechnician even if damage is notobvious.Tires deteriorate with age even if theyhave never or seldom been used.This applies also to the spare tire andtires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRESWhen replacing a tire, use a tire ofthe same size and construction,and the same or greater load ca-pacity as the originally installedtires.Using any other size or type of tiremay seriously affect handling, ride,speedometer/odometer calibration,ground clearance, and clearance be-tween the body and tires or snowchains.Check that the maximum load of thereplaced tire is greater than 1/2 of theGross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)of either the front axle or the rearaxle, whichever is greater. As for themaximum load of the tire, see the loadlimit at maximum cold tire inflationpressure mentioned on the sidewallof the tire, and as for the Gross AxleWeight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-tification Label. For details about thesidewall of the tire and the Certifica-tion Label, see pages 334 and 332.

413

CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accidentmay occur resulting in death orserious injuries.� Do not mix radial, bias belted,

or bias−ply tires on your ve-hicle, as this may cause dan-gerous handling characteris-tics resulting in loss of control.

� Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s recommendedsize, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristicsresulting in loss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires,or at least both front or rear tiresbe replaced at a time as a set.See “If you have a flat tire” on page365 for tire change procedure.

When a tire is replaced, the wheelshould always be balanced.An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-hicle handling and tire life. Wheelscan get out of balance with regularuse and should therefore be balancedoccasionally.When replacing a tubeless tire, theair valve should also be replacedwith a new one.

82p104a

To equalize tire wear and help ex-tend tire life, Toyota recommendsthat you rotate your tires accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.(For scheduled maintenance infor-mation, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-er’s Manual Supplement”.)However, the most appropriate tim-ing for tire rotation may vary ac-cording to your driving habits androad surface conditions.The wheel assemblies must be ro-tated as illustrated above.

Rotating tires

414

When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire infla-tion pressure, improper wheel align-ment, out−of−balance wheels, or se-vere braking.

CAUTION

Do not include a compact sparetire when rotating the tires. It isdesigned for temporary use only.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES ORCHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommendedwhen driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tiresprovide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires ofthe same size, construction and loadcapacity as the originally installed tires.

Do not use tires other than those men-tioned above. Do not install studded tireswithout first checking local regulations forpossible restrictions.

CAUTION

Do not use snow tires other than themanufacturer’s recommended size, asthis may cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol. Otherwise, an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on allwheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheelsonly can lead to an excessive differencein road grip capability between the frontand rear tires which could cause loss ofvehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you shouldstore them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sureto install them in the same direction whenreplacing.

CAUTION

� Do not drive with the snow tiresincorrectly inflated.

� Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)with any type of snow tires.

Installing snow tires andchains

415

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Regulations regarding the use of tirechains vary according to location ortype of road, so always check local reg-ulations before installing chains.

Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chains,with the exception of radial cable chainsor V−bar type chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the front tires astightly as possible. Do not use tirechains on the rear tires. Retightenchains after driving 0.5 − 1.0 km (1/4 −1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-fully follow the instructions of the chainmanufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will bescratched by the chain band, so removethe covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

� Drive carefully avoiding bumps,holes, and sharp turns, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

� Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheelbraking, as use of chains may ad-versely affect vehicle handling.

� When driving with chains installed,be sure to drive carefully. Slowdown before entering curves toavoid losing control of the vehicle.Otherwise an accident may occur.

NOTICE

Do not attempt to use a tire chain onthe compact spare tire, as it may re-sult in damage to the vehicle as wellas the tire.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such asbending, cracks or heavy corrosion, thewheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,the tire may slip off the wheel or causeloss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should betaken to ensure that the wheels are re-placed by ones with the same load ca-pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

This must be observed on compact sparetire, too.

Correct replacement wheels are availableat your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type mayadversely affect handling, wheel and bear-ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-eter calibration, stopping ability, headlightaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-ance, and tire or snow chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

Replacing wheels

416

Replacement with used wheels is not rec-ommended as they may have been sub-jected to rough treatment or high mileageand could fail without warning. Also, bentwheels which have been straightened mayhave structural damage and thereforeshould not be used. Never use an innertube in a leaking wheel which is designedfor a tubeless tire.

� When installing aluminum wheels,check that the wheel nuts are tightafter driving your vehicle the first 1600km (1000 miles).

� If you have rotated, repaired, orchanged your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving1600 km (1000 miles).

� When using tire chains, be careful notto damage the aluminum wheels.

� Use only Toyota wheel nuts andwrench designed for your aluminumwheels.

� When balancing your wheels, use onlyToyota balance weights or equivalentand a plastic or rubber hammer.

� As with any wheel, periodically checkyour aluminum wheels for damage. Ifdamaged, replace immediately.

Aluminum wheel precautions

417

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEElectrical componentsChecking 12 volt battery condition 418. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 volt battery recharging precautions 420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8– 3

418

CAUTION

12 VOLT BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

When the 12 volt battery must be re-placed, use the Prius designated bat-tery.

The 12 volt battery produces flam-mable and explosive hydrogen gas.

� Do not cause a spark from the bat-tery with tools.

� Do not smoke or light a match nearthe battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.

� Avoid contact with eyes, skin orclothes.

� Never ingest electrolyte.

� Wear protective safety glasses whenworking near the battery.

� Keep children away from the bat-tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

� If electrolyte gets in your eyes,flush your eyes with clean waterand get immediate medical atten-tion. If possible, continue to applywater with a sponge or cloth whileen route to the medical office.

� If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contact area. Ifyou feel pain or burn, get medicalattention immediately.

� If electrolyte gets on your clothes,there is a possibility of its soakingthrough to your skin, so immediate-ly take off the exposed clothing andfollow the procedure above, if nec-essary.

� If you accidentally swallow electro-lyte, drink a large quantity of wateror milk. Follow with milk of magne-sia, beaten raw egg or vegetableoil. Then go immediately for emer-gency help.

83p035

Open the back door. Remove the lug-gage storage box and 12 volt batterycover.

If the back door does not open, see “Ifyou cannot operate back door opener” onpage 380.

Checking 12 volt batterycondition——Precautions

—Checking 12 volt batteryexterior

419

83p001c

Terminals

Ground cableHold−down clamp

Check the battery for corroded or looseterminal connections, cracks, or loosehold−down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it offwith a solution of warm water and bak-ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-nals with grease to prevent further cor-rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,tighten their clamp nuts—but do notovertighten.

c. Tighten the hold−down clamp onlyenough to keep the battery firmly inplace. Overtightening may damage thebattery case.

NOTICE

� Be sure the hybrid system and allaccessories are off before perform-ing maintenance.

� When checking the battery, removethe ground cable from the negativeterminal (“–” mark) first and rein-stall it last.

� Be careful not to cause a short cir-cuit with tools.

� Take care no solution gets into thebattery when washing it.

If the 12 volt battery is disconnected orrun down, the power window and backdoor may not operate automatically andthe jam protection function will not func-tion correctly and does not open the backdoor after you reconnect, replace or re-charge the battery. In any of these cases,you should normalize each system. Tonormalize them, see “Power windows” onpage 43 and “Back door” on page 42.

Before you disconnect the 12 volt battery,confirm the shift position is “P” and applythe parking brake completely.

After you reconnect the 12 volt battery,shift the shift lever to “N” and confirm theshift position is “N” when the “IG−ON”mode is enabled.

After connecting the cables, the hybridsystem may not start by pushing the“POWER” switch. In that case, push itonce again.

420

During recharging, the battery is pro-ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installedon the vehicle, be sure to disconnectthe ground cable.

2. Make sure the power switch on therecharger is off when connecting thecharger cables to the battery and whendisconnecting them.

CAUTION

� Always charge the battery in an un-confined area. Do not charge thebattery in a garage or closed roomwhere there is not sufficient ventila-tion.

� Only do a slow charge (3.5A orless). Charging at a quicker rate isdangerous. The battery may ex-plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery with thehybrid system on. Also, be sure allaccessories are turned off.

83p003

Type A

Type B

Type C

Good Blown

Good Blown

Good Blown

12 volt battery rechargingprecautions Checking and replacing fuses

421

83p004b

If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work, check thefuses. If any of the fuses are blown,they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 397 forlocations of the fuses.

Turn the hybrid system and inoperativecomponent off. Pull the suspected fusestraight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing theproblem. The lid of the fuse box showsthe name of the circuit for each fuse. Seepage 435 for the functions controlled byeach circuit.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by thepull−out tool. The location of the pull−outtool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse hasblown, try replacing the suspected fusewith one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuseinto the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in anemergency you can pull out the “DOME”or “OBD” fuse, which may be dispensablefor normal driving, and use it if its amper-age rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-age, use one that is lower, but as closeto the rating as possible. If the amperageis lower than that specified, the fusemight blow out again. but this does notindicate anything wrong. Be sure to getthe correct fuse as soon as possible andreturn the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set ofspare fuses and keep them in your ve-hicle for emergencies.

If the new fuse immediately blows out,there is a problem with the electrical sys-tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it assoon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-perage rating, or any other object, inplace of a fuse. This may cause ex-tensive damage and possibly a fire.

422

If any washer does not work, the wash-er tank may be empty. Add washerfluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.However, in cold areas where tempera-tures range below the freezing point, usewasher fluid containing antifreeze. Thisproduct is available at your Toyota dealerand most auto parts stores. Follow themanufacturer’s directions for how much tomix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

The following illustrations show how togain access to the bulbs. When replacinga bulb, make sure the hybrid system andlight switch are off. Use bulbs with thewattage ratings given in the table.

The stop lights and high mounted stoplightconsist of a number of LEDs. If any ofthe LEDs burn out, take your vehicle toyour Toyota dealer to have the light re-placed.

If two or more LEDs in a stop light burnout, your vehicle may not conform to locallaws (SAE).

CAUTION

� To prevent burning yourself, do notreplace the light bulbs while theyare hot.

� Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and require special handling.They can burst or shatter ifscratched or dropped. Hold a bulbonly by its plastic or metal case.Do not touch the glass part of abulb with bare hands.

Vehicles with discharge headlights—

� Do not touch the high−intensity dis-charge headlight’s high voltagesocket when the headlights areturned on. An extremely high volt-age of 20,000V will be dischargedand could result in serious injuryor death by electric shock.

� Do not attempt to take apart or re-pair the headlight bulbs, connec-tors, power supply circuits, or re-lated components. Doing so couldresult in electric shock and seriousinjury or death. Call your Toyotadealer for headlight repair or servic-ing, including replacement of bulbsand bulb disposal.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

Adding washer fluid Replacing light bulbs—

423

The inside of the lens of exterior lightssuch as headlights may temporarily fog upwhen the lense becomes wet in the rainor in a car wash. This is not a problembecause the fogging is caused by thetemperature difference between the outsideand inside of the lense, just like thewindshield fogs up in the rain. However, ifthere is a large drop of water on theinside of the lense, or if there is waterpooled inside the light, contact yourToyota dealer.

Light bulbsBulbNo.

W Type

Headlights

Discharge headlights

Halogen headlights

—

—

35

60/55

A

B

Front fog lights 9006 51 C

Parking lights — 5 D

Front turn signallights

— 21 D

Rear turn signal lights — 21 D

Tail lights — 5 D

Stop lights — 4.4 F

High mounted stop-light

— 2.8 F

Back−up lights 7440 21 D

License plate lights — 5 D

Interior lights — 8 E

Personal lights — 5 D

Door courtesy lights — 5 D

Vanity lights — 5 E

Luggage c ompar t-ment light

— 5 E

A: D4R Discharge bulbs

B: HB2 Halogen bulbs

C: HB4 Halogen bulbs

D: Wedge base bulbs

E: Double end bulbs

F: LEDs (Light−emitting Diodes)

424

—Headlights

83p030a

1. Open the hood. Remove the clipsand take out the cover.

Remove and install the clips as shown inthe following illustrations.

83p031

Removing clip

83p032

Installing clip

83p010a

2. RIGHT−HAND HEADLIGHT ONLY: Re-move the clip and take out the aircleaner inlet.

Remove and install the clip as shown inthe following illustrations.

425

83p011

Removing clip

83p012

Installing clip

83p013a

3. Unplug the connector. Turn the bulbcover counter−clockwise and removeit.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

83p014a

4. Release the bulb retaining springand remove the bulb along with thesocket. Install a new bulb into thesocket and return the bulb retainingspring to its original position.

To install a bulb, align the tabs of thebulb with the cutout of the mounting hole.

426

83p015b

5. Install the bulb cover and turn itclockwise. Plug in the connector.

If either the left or right front fog lightsburns out, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace the front foglight bulbs by yourself. You may dam-age the vehicle.

—Parking lights

83p016a

83p017a

—Front fog lights

427

83p018a

83p019b

83p023a

83p024b

83p025c

a: Rear turn signal lightb: Back−up lightc: Tail light

—Front turn signal lights—Rear turn signal, tail andback−up lights

428

83p026b

Remove the cover.

83p027a

83p028b

—License plate lights

429

SPECIFICATIONSSpecificationsDimensions and weight 430. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric motor 430. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 430. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 431. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid battery 431. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service specifications 431. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires 434. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses 435. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9

430

Overall length mm (in.) 4445 (175.0)

Overall width mm (in.) 1725 (67.9)

Overall height mm (in.) 1490 (58.7)*

Wheelbase mm (in.) 2700 (106.3)

Front tread mm (in.) 1505 (59.3)

Rear tread mm (in.) 1480 (58.3)

Vehicle capacity weight(occupants + luggage)

kg (lb.) 365 (810)

*: Unladen vehicle

Electric motorType: Permanent magnet synchronous

motor (water cooling)

Maximum output:/rpm:50 kW

Maximum torque:400 N·m (40.8 kgf·m, 295 ft·lbf)

Model: 1.5 L 4−cylinder (1NZ−FXE)

Type: 4−cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):75.0 x 84.7 (2.95 x 3.33)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):1497 (91.4)

Dimensions and weight Engine

431

Fuel type:Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) or higher

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., lmp.gal.):45 (11.9, 9.9)

Hybrid batteryType: Nickel−Metal hydride battery

Voltage: 7.2 V

Capacity: 6.5 Ah (3HR)

Quantity: 28

Overall voltage: 201.6 V

Service specificationsENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):Intake 0.17 − 0.23 (0.007 − 0.009)Exhaust 0.27 − 0.33 (0.011 − 0.013)

Spark plug type:DENSO SK16R11NGK IFR5A11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):1.1 (0.043)

Fuel

432

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,lmp.qt.):

With filter 3.7 (3.9, 3.3)Without filter 3.4 (3.6, 3.0)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in yourToyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved “ToyotaGenuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy thefollowing grade and viscosity.

Oil grade:

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:

SAE 5W−30

oil008

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for furtherdetails.

COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp.qt.):For gasoline engine 8.6 (9.0, 7.5)For electric motor and inverter and converter 2.7 (2.9, 2.4)

Coolant type:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” isused in your Toyota vehicle at factoryfill. In order to avoid technical prob-lems, only use “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality ethyl-ene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−boratecoolant with long−life hybrid organicacid technology. (Coolant with long−lifehybrid organic acid technology is acombination of low phosphates and or-ganic acids.)


Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

433

12 VOLT BATTERY

Open voltage at 20�C (68�F):12.6 − 12.8 V Fully charged12.2 − 12.4 V Half charged11.5 − 11.9 V Discharged

[Voltage that is checked 20 minutes afterthe key is removed with all the lightsturned off]

Charging rates: 3.5 A max.

HYBRID TRANSAXLE

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.qt.):

3.6 (3.8, 3.2)

Fluid type: “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” or equivalent

Please contact your Toyota dealer for furtherdetails.

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressedwith the force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf)with the traction motor running, mm (in.):

101.0 (3.98)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):1 − 4 (0.04 − 0.16)

Parking brake adjustment when depressedwith the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf):

6 − 9 clicks

Fluid type:SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play:Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

434

Tire size and inflation pressure:

Standard

Tire size

Cold tire inflation pressure kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi) Wheel size

Front Rear

P185/65R15 86S240 (2.4, 35) 230 (2.3, 33)

15 � 6 JJ

P195/55R16 86V 16 � 6 JJ

Spare

Tire size Cold tire inflation pressure kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi) Wheel size

T125/70D16 96M 420 (4.2, 60) 16 X 4T

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf): 103 (10.5, 76)

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions”, page 409 through 416.

Tires

435

90p007b

Instrument panel

1. PWR 30 A: Power windows

2. DEF 40 A: Rear window defogger

3. M/HTR 15 A: Outside rear view mirrorheater

4. WIP 30 A: Windshield wiper

5. RR WIP 15 A: Rear wiper

6. WSH 20 A: Washer

7. ECU−IG 7.5 A: Smart entry and startsystem, power windows, multi−informa-tion display, electric power steering,theft deterrent system

90p005b

Engine compartment

8. GAUGE 10 A: Gauge and meter, back−up lights, emergency flasher, powerwindows

9. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-tem

10. STOP 7.5 A: Stop lights

11. DOOR 25 A: Power door lock system

12. ACC−B 25 A: “POWER OUTLET”,“ACC” fuses

13. ECU−B 15 A: Multi−information display,power windows, air conditioning system

14. AM1 7.5 A: Hybrid system

90p008b

Luggage compartment

15. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, license plateslight, parking lights

16. PANEL 7.5 A: Multi−information dis-play, clock, audio system, instrumentpanel lights

17. A/C (HTR) 10 A: Air conditioning sys-tem

18. FR DOOR 20 A: Power windows

19. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlet

20. ACC 7.5 A: Audio system, multi−infor-mation display, clock

21. PWR OUTLET FR 15 A: Power outlet

Fuses

436

22. IGN 7.5 A: Hybrid system, hybrid ve-hicle immobilizer system, SRS airbags

23. SPARE 30 A: Spare

24. SPARE 15 A: Spare

25. DRL 7.5 A: Daytime running light sys-tem

26. H−LP LO RH 15 A (Vehicles with dis-charged headlight) or 10 A (Vehicleswith halogen headlight): Right−handheadlight (low beam)

27. H−LP LO LH 15 A (Vehicles with dis-charged headlight) or 10 A (Vehicleswith halogen headlight): Left−handheadlight (low beam)

28. H−LP HI RH 10 A: Right−hand head-light (high beam)

29. H−LP HI LH 10 A: Left−hand headlight(high beam)

30. EFI 15 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

31. AM2 15 A: “IGN” fuse, ignition system

32. HORN 10 A: Horn

33. HEV 20 A: Hybrid system

34. P CON MAIN 7.5 A: Parking controlsystem, hybrid vehicle immobilizer sys-tem

35. ABS−1 25 A: Anti−lock brake system

36. ETCS 10 A: Electronic throttle controlsystem

37. BATT FAN 10 A: Battery cooling fan

38. HAZ 10 A: Turn signal lights, emergen-cy flasher

39. DOME 15 A: Audio system, interiorlights, smart entry and start system,gauge and meter, turn signal lights,luggage room light, clock

40. ABS MAIN3 15 A: Anti−lock brake sys-tem



43. FR FOG 15 A: Fog lights

44. CHS W/P 10 A: CHS W/P

45. AMP 30 A: Audio system

46. PTC HTR2 30 A: PTC heater

47. PTC HTR1 30 A: PTC heater

48. CDS FAN 30 A: Electric cooling fan

49. DC/DS−S 5 A: Inverter and converter

50. MAIN 120 A: Hybrid system

437

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.OWNERSReporting safety defects for U.S. ownersReporting safety defects for U.S. owners 438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 10

438

If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could cause a crashor could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the Na-tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-ministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Toyota Motor Sales,U.S.A., Inc. (Toll−free:1−800−331−4331).

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safety de-fect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individual prob-lems between you, your dealer, orToyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotline toll−freeat 1−888−327−4236 (TTY:1−800−424−9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, DC20590. You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting safety defects forU.S. owners

439

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage

warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safe-ty and vehicle damage warnings. Youmust follow these warnings carefully toavoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they looklike, and how they are used in this manu-al are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anythingwhich may cause injury to peopleif the warning is ignored. You areinformed about what you must ormust not do in order to reduce therisk of injury to yourself and oth-ers.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anythingwhich may cause damage to thevehicle or its equipment if thewarning is ignored. You are in-formed about what you must ormust not do in order to avoid orreduce the risk of damage to yourvehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see thesafety symbol shownabove, it means: “Donot...”; “Do not dothis”; or “Do not letthis happen”.

440

Important information about your Toyota

441

Occupant restraint sys-tems

Toyota encourages you and yourfamily to take the time to readSection 2−2 of this Owner’s Manu-al carefully. In terms of helpingyou understand how you can re-ceive the maximum benefit of theoccupant restraint systems this ve-hicle provides, Section 2−2 of thisOwner’s Manual is the most im-portant section for you and yourfamily to read.

Section 2−2 describes the functionand operation concerning seats,seat belts, SRS airbags and childrestraint systems of this vehicleand some potential hazards youshould be aware of. These sys-tems work together along with theoverall structure of this vehicle inorder to provide occupant restraintin the event of a crash. The effectof each system is enhanced whenit is used properly and togetherwith other systems. No single oc-cupant restraint system can, by it-self, provide you or your familywith the equal level of restraintwhich these systems can providewhen used together. That is why itis important for you and your fam-ily to understand the purpose andproper use of each of these sys-tems and how they relate to eachother.

The purpose of all occupant re-straint systems is to help reducethe possibility of death or seriousinjury in the event of a collision.None of these systems, either in-dividually or together, can ensurethat there is no injury in the eventof collision. However, the moreyou know about these systemsand how to use them properly, thegreater your chances become ofsurviving an accident without deathor serious injury.

Seat belts provide the primary re-straint to all occupants of the ve-hicle, and every occupant of thevehicle should wear seat beltsproperly at all times. Childrenshould always be secured in childrestraint systems that are ap-propriate for their age and size.SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) airbags are, as their namesimply, designed to work with, andbe supplemental to, seat belts andare not substitutes for them. SRSairbags can be very effective inreducing the risk of head andchest injuries by preventing con-tact of the head and chest withinterior portions of the vehicle.

443

In order to be effective, the SRSairbags must deploy with tremen-dous speed. The rapid deploymentof the SRS airbags makes theSRS airbags themselves potentialsources of serious injury if an oc-cupant is too close to an airbag,or if an object or some part of hisor her body has been placed be-tween the occupant and the airbagat the time of deployment. This isjust one example of how the in-structions in Section 2−2 of thisOwner’s Manual will help ensureproper use of the occupant re-straint systems, and increase thesafety they can provide to youand your family in the event of anaccident.

Toyota recommends you to readthe provisions in Section 2−2 care-fully and refer to them as neededduring your time of ownership ofthis vehicle.

Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers thatmonitor and control certain as-pects of your vehicle. These com-puters assist in driving and main-taining optimal vehicle perfor-mance. Besides storing data usefulfor troubleshooting, there is a sys-tem to record data in a crash ora near car crash event. This iscalled an Event Data Recorder(EDR).

The SRS airbag sensor assemblycontains the EDR. In a crash or anear car crash event, this devicemay record some or all of the fol-lowing information:

� Engine speed

� Whether the brake pedal wasapplied or not

� Vehicle speed

� To what extent the acceleratorpedal was depressed

� Position of the transmissionselector lever

� Whether the driver and frontpassenger wore the seat beltsor not

� Driver’s seat position

� Front passenger’s occupantclassification

445

� SRS airbag deployment data

� SRS airbag system diagnosticdata

If your vehicle is equipped with avehicle stability control (VSC) sys-tem, its Electronic Control Unit(ECU) may contain another EDR.There are a variety of driving situ-ations which include activating theVSC under which the VSC EDRwill record certain information. TheVSC EDR may record some or allof the following information:

� Behavior of the vehicle

� Steering wheel angle

� Vehicle speed

� To what extent the acceleratorpedal was depressed

� To what extent the brake ped-al was applied

� To what extent the ECU con-trolled the condition of the 4wheels

� Vehicle stability control sys-tem diagnostic data

The information above is intendedto be used for the purpose of im-proving vehicle safety perfor-mance. Unlike general data record-ers, the EDR does not recordsound data such as conversationbetween passengers.

Toyota will not disclose the datarecorded in an EDR to a thirdparty except when:

� An agreement from the ve-hicle’s owner (or the leasingcompany for a leased vehicle)is obtained

� Officially requested by the po-lice or other authorities

� Used as a defence for Toyotain a law suit

� Ordered by the court

However, if necessary Toyota will:

� Use the data for research onToyota vehicle safety perfor-mance

� Disclose the data to a thirdparty for research purposeswithout disclosing details ofthe vehicle owner, and onlywhen it is deemed necessary

� Disclose summarized datacleared of vehicle identifica-tion information to a non−To-yota organization for researchpurposes

446

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered bythe following Toyota limited war-ranties:

� New vehicle warranty

� Emission control systems war-ranty

� Others

For further information, please re-fer to the “Owner’s Warranty Infor-mation Booklet” or “Owner’s Manu-al Supplement”.

Your responsibility formaintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility tomake sure the specified mainte-nance is performed. Section 7gives details of these maintenancerequirements. Also included inSection 7 is general maintenance.For scheduled maintenance infor-mation, please refer to the“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Important health andsafety

information about yourToyota

447

CAUTION

� WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-nents contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birth de-fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as wellas waste produced by component wear contain oremit chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and birth defects or other repro-ductive harm.

� Battery posts, terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. Wash yourhands after handling. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Always protect your skin by washingthoroughly with soap and water.

449

Accessories, spareparts and

modification of yourToyota

A wide variety of non−genuinespare parts and accessories forToyota vehicles are currently avail-able in the market. You shouldknow that Toyota does not warrantthese products and is not respon-sible for their performance, repair,or replacement, or for any damagethey may cause to, or adverse ef-fect they may have on, your Toyo-ta vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modi-fied with non−genuine Toyotaproducts. Modification with non−genuine Toyota products could af-fect its performance, safety or du-rability, and may even violate gov-ernmental regulations. In addition,damage or performance problemsresulting from the modification maynot be covered under warranty.

Spark ignition system ofyour Toyota

The spark ignition system in yourToyota meets all requirements ofthe Canadian Interference−CausingEquipment Standard.

Installation of a mobiletwo−way radio system

As the installation of a mobiletwo−way radio system in your ve-hicle could affect electronic sys-tems such as multiport fuel injec-tion system / sequential multiportfuel injection system, cruise con-trol system, anti−lock brake sys-tem, vehicle stability control sys-tem, SRS airbag system, seat beltpretensioner system and Toyotahybrid system, be sure to checkwith your Toyota dealer for pre-cautionary measures or specialinstructions regarding installation.

450

Smart entry and startsystem

Users of any electrical medical de-vices such as implanted pacemak-ers should consult the manufactur-er of the device for informationabout its operation under the influ-ence of radio waves. Radio wavescould have unexpected effects onthe operation of such medical de-vices. For details, see “Keys” onpage 20 and “Smart entry andstart system” on page 24.

Tires and loading onyour Toyota

Underinflated or overinflatedtire inflation pressure and theexcess load may result in thedeterioration of steering abilityand braking ability, leading toan accident. Check the tireinflation pressure periodicallyand be sure to keep the loadlimits given in this Owner’sManual. For details about tireinflation pressure and load lim-its, see page 409 and pages344.

Scrapping of your ToyotaThe SRS airbag and seat belt pre-tensioner devices in your Toyotacontain explosive chemicals. If thevehicle is scrapped with the airbagsand pretensioners left as they are,this may cause an accident such asfire. Be sure to have the systemsof the SRS airbag and seat beltpretensioner removed and disposedof by the qualified service shop orby your Toyota dealer before youdispose of your vehicle.

451

CAUTION

When your vehicle or bat-tery needs to be disposedof, be sure to consult yourToyota dealer. Hybrid bat-teries must be collectedthrough Toyota dealers. Ifyour vehicle is disposedof without dismantling,someone could receive anelectric shock by touchingthe high voltage parts ofthe hybrid battery. If thebattery is not disposed ofproperly, its contents cancause death or serious in-jury.

452

Hybrid battery

The hybrid battery has a limitedservice life. Call your Toyota deal-er for information about recyclingor disposal of hybrid battery andyour vehicle.

Leak detectionpump

This pump performs fuel evapora-tion leakage check. This check isdone approximately five hours af-ter the hybrid system is turnedoff. So you may hear a soundcoming from underneath the lug-gage compartment for several min-utes. It does not indicate a mal-function.

PerchlorateMaterial

Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardou-swaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components thatmay contain perchlorate. Thesecomponents may include airbag,seat belt pretensioners, and wire-less remote control batteries.

453

CAUTION

454

Precautions for useof hybrid vehicle

The vehicle has both high voltageDC and AC systems as well as a12−volt system. DC and AC highvoltage are both very dangerousand can cause death or serious inju-ry, severe burns and electric shock.

� In order to avoid personal in-juries, do not touch the highvoltage cables (orange col-ored) and their connectors.

� Follow the caution labels at-tached to the high voltageparts.

� Do not remove or replace thehigh voltage parts such asthe inverter unit (located inthe engine compartment), hy-brid battery (located behindrear seat), etc.

� Do not touch the service pluglocated in the left side trimof the luggage compartmentwithout hybrid system techni-cal training. (See “Precau-tions for use” on page 14.)This component is providedto disable the high voltagesystem in case of servicing ata Toyota dealer.

CAUTION If an accident occurs

� Pull your vehicle off the road,push the “P” position switch,stop the hybrid system and ifthe key is inserted into keyslot, remove it.

� In order to avoid personal in-juries, do not touch any highvoltage wirings and their con-nectors, and high voltageparts (inverter unit, hybridbattery, etc.).

� If some exposed electricwires are protruding inside oroutside of your vehicle, anelectric shock may occur.Never touch the electricwires.

� If fluid leaks or gets in someparts of the vehicle, nevertouch it because it may beelectrolyte (strong alkali) fromthe hybrid battery. If it getsinto your skin or eyes, washoff immediately with a largeamount of water, if possible,boric acid solution, and getimmediate medical attentionin order to help avoid seriousinjury.

� If a vehicle fire occurs, extin-guish it using a fire extin-guisher for the exclusive useon electric fires. Or, use alarge amount of water to pre-vent flammable gas from be-ing generated from the batter-ies.

455

� If your vehicle needs to betowed, do it with the frontwheels raised. For details ontowing, see “If your vehicleneeds to be towed” on page376.

456

CAUTION

High Voltage

Your vehicle is equipped withcables connected to parts ofthe vehicle subject to high volt-age (about 500 V at maximum).There are some other parts thatreach high temperatures whileyou drive. Never touch batterycables (wrapped in orange−col-ored harnesses) or their con-nectors since they are underhigh voltage and dangerous.Caution labels are applied tothese parts to identify them.Carefully observe the instruc-tions on these caution labels.

00p001

2

Publication No. OM47568UPart No. 01999-47568Printed in Japan 01−0701−00

U−7

( U)

Quick index

� If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 125. . .

� If your vehicle will not start 360. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle overheats 364. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If you have a flat tire 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle needs to be towed 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Tips for driving during break-in period 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� How to start the hybrid system 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� General maintenance 391. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91)or higher.

See page 320 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity: 45 L (11.9 gal., 9.9 lmp.gal.)See page 322 for detailed information.

Engine oil: ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.

See page 405 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 409 through 416.

Tire inflation pressure: See page 434.

C

section 1 · 2017-07-24 · 6 indicator symbols on the instrument cluster and multi−information...

Documents